Toshiba Rd Xs55Ku Operation Manual XS55SU_Ope_E_p002 011

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-Rd-Xs55Ku-Operation-Manual-129049 toshiba-rd-xs55ku-operation-manual-129049 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 199 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Recording Playback Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Editing
TOSHIBA HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER
RD-XS55KU
H
Printed in China
Printed on 70% Recycled Paper
HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER
RD-XS55KU
PM0026072010
P000458240
OWNER’S MANUAL
Read “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.
OPERATIONS
GUIDE
DIGITAL VIDEO
Others
© 2006 Toshiba Corporation
IMPORTANT NOTE
Before connecting, operating, or adjusting this
product, carefully read the Important Safety,
Installation, Care, and Service Information in the
INSTALLATION GUIDE.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p001-200 06.3.20, 2:04 PM1
2
Introduction
Table of contents
Introduction
Caution for safety ................................................ 4
About this product .............................................. 5
Choosing a disc .................................................. 6
Index to parts and controls .............................. 12
Front panel ............................................................... 12
Rear panel ............................................................... 14
Remote control ........................................................ 16
Display ..................................................................... 18
Before operating this recorder ........................ 20
Using TV Guide On Screen®............................. 23
Services and options ............................................... 24
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU .. 29
Recording
Before recording ............................................... 32
Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical format) .... 34
DVD-RAM physical format ....................................... 35
Entering characters .................................................. 36
Selecting a disc according to purposes of
use (DVD-RAM/R/RW) ............................................. 38
Setting for recording on a DVD-R/RW disc in
Video mode .............................................................. 39
Setting a timer recording using
TV Guide On Screen®........................................ 40
With recording frequency selection only .................. 40
Changing the recording options ............................... 41
Setting recording by specifying details manually ..... 43
Setting recording (For satellite box users) ............... 43
Recording a TV program ................................... 45
Recording an external source .......................... 49
DV recording (Recording from a digital video
camera) .............................................................. 52
Deleting recorded contents .............................. 55
To delete a title (chapter) ......................................... 55
Deleting multiple specified parts .............................. 55
Others ................................................................. 56
To protect recorded content ..................................... 56
Relay recording ........................................................ 56
Technical Information ............................................... 56
Playback
Playing recorded contents
(CONTENT MENU) ............................................. 60
Playing at various speeds ........................................ 62
Playing a DVD video disc ................................. 66
Locating a title using the top menu .......................... 66
Other playback functions ................................. 68
Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later
(Pause TV) ............................................................... 68
Playing a TV program currently being recorded
(Chase Play) ............................................................ 69
Zooming a picture .................................................... 70
Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window
(P in P playback) ...................................................... 70
Locating by entering the number of a desired
section ..................................................................... 71
Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed
time (Time Search) .................................................. 71
Selecting the sound ................................................. 72
Viewing JPEG files ................................................... 74
Playing MP3/WMA files ............................................ 76
Checking the current status and settings ................. 78
Functions in Quick Menu ......................................... 80
Editing
Creating your own title ..................................... 84
Editing procedure ..................................................... 84
Basic flow ................................................................. 85
1: Changing a name of a recorded title .................... 86
2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters ..... 87
3: Collecting necessary scenes ............................... 92
4: Dubbing to save ................................................... 97
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ....... 112
DVD-Video finalizing process ........................ 122
Other editing functions................................... 126
Changing the picture on CONTENT MENU ........... 126
Combining two titles (Original) into one ................. 128
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.22, 3:18 PM2
3
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
Library
Using Library data........................................... 132
Basic operation of the Library system .................... 132
Searching for a desired title ........................... 133
Changing the listing order ...................................... 133
Searching ............................................................... 133
Jumping ................................................................. 134
Viewing Library data ....................................... 135
Viewing title information ......................................... 135
Viewing disc information ........................................ 135
Maintenance of Library data .................................. 136
Checking remaining space ............................. 139
Viewing a number and space of a disc .................. 139
Viewing remaining space ....................................... 139
Network Navi
What is Network Navi? ................................... 142
Main features of Network Navi ............................... 142
Flow of Network Navi setting ................................. 142
Operating environment .......................................... 143
Terminology and trademarks ................................. 143
Restrictions and disclaimer .................................... 143
Preparation for Network Navi ......................... 145
1: Connection to a PC ............................................ 145
2: Recorder's setup-Network setting ...................... 147
3: Setting up the PC ............................................... 151
4: Starting Network Navi ........................................ 152
5: Network Navi settings ........................................ 153
Network Navi features..................................... 154
Displaying thumbnails (Title List).................. 155
Operating with the remote control screen .... 157
Net Keyboard ......................................................... 158
Operation using the Virtual Remote Control .......... 159
Using Library information (Library) ............... 160
Setting for custom menu addition
(Custom Menu Editor) ..................................... 161
Net Dubbing ..................................................... 163
Dubbing to a device on the same network ............. 163
Net Monitor ...................................................... 165
Setting a timer recording using email ........... 168
Setting a timer recording by directly specifying
the date, time, and channel.................................... 168
Useful features of timer recording setting using
email ...................................................................... 169
If you are having a difficulty with Network
Navi features .................................................... 170
Function setup
Customizing the function settings ................ 172
DVD player settings................................................ 176
Picture/Audio settings ............................................ 179
Display settings ...................................................... 181
Operational settings ............................................... 182
DVD recorder operation ......................................... 183
Management settings ............................................ 186
Initial settings ......................................................... 187
Others
Before calling service personnel ................... 190
Output sound conversion table ..................... 192
Error codes on the display window ............... 193
Recording duration ......................................... 194
Language code list .......................................... 195
Specification .................................................... 196
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.22, 3:18 PM3
4
Introduction
Introduction
Caution for safety
Read SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS,
Precautions and all other sections of the INSTALLATION GUIDE that
came with this product prior to reading this OPERATIONS GUIDE.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM4
5
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
About this product
Introduction
Some differences
Because of its recording capability and hard disc drive
(HDD), this DVD recorder operates more like a computer
and differently than a standard DVD player. In addition to
containing a microprocessor, it contains a HDD, an
operating system, random access memory (RAM), and a
DVD-RAM/RW/R drive. The operating system includes
software stored on the HDD that is transferred to the
RAM when the machine is turned on and at other times
during operation. This transfer can take time. Therefore,
when you turn the DVD recorder on, it may take a little
while before it is ready to use. Likewise, other functions
may not be performed as quickly as they would on other
AV equipment. Additionally, because programs stored on
the DVD-RAM/RW/R drive cannot be accessed as
quickly as those stored on the HDD, accessing those
programs (or deleting a program from a DVD-RAM disc)
may take more time. Please take these factors into
consideration as you use the DVD recorder.
About the hard disc drive (HDD)
Like any HDD, the HDD in the DVD recorder is a fragile
device that is susceptible to partial or complete failure if it
is jarred or as a result of use over time. It will not last
forever. Therefore, do not use the HDD for longer term
storage of programs you wish to retain. [If portions of the
HDD become damaged, programs recorded on those
portions may exhibit pixelization or block noise when
played back. Repeated playback of the program may
cause the problem to get worse and, eventually, the
program may become unplayable. Accordingly, if you
notice such noise in a program that you want to save,
you should transfer to a recordable DVD disc as soon as
possible.] Recordable DVD discs are also susceptible to
damage if not handled and stored carefully and some or
all of the programs on them may become unplayable.
You can reduce these risks by using high quality DVD
recordable discs and checking their playability from time
to time. If it becomes necessary to service your DVD
recorder, it may be necessary to delete some or all of the
programs on the HDD.
Playback Restrictions
This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions for
this recorder. Some DVD video discs are produced in a
manner that allows specific or limited operation during
playback. As such, the recorder may not respond to all
operating commands. This is not a defect in the
recorder. Please refer to the notes on compatible discs
later in this Introduction and to the discussion of DVD
playback and features later in this manual.
may appear on the TV screen during operation.
means that the operation is not permitted by the
recorder or the disc.
Recording Restrictions and Copyright
Copy-protected contents of DVD-Video discs, VIDEO
CDs or audio CDs on the market cannot be copied on
this recorder. Contents without copy protection should
be copied or edited only in accordance with applicable
copyright laws, which may restrict copying or editing.
Contents that permit single copying (copy once
contents) can be recorded onto DVD-RAM discs, with
some dubbing and editing restrictions. DVD-R/RW discs
cannot record these contents.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or
revision of copyrighted materials including, without
limitation, television programs, videotapes, and DVDs,
is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United
States and other countries, and may subject you to civil
and criminal liability.
Compatibility
In isolated cases, a disc bearing the DVD or CD logo
may not fully and properly play back all features or as
intended by the creator of the disc. This can be due,
among other reasons, to problems and errors that can
occur during the creation or recording of DVD and other
software and the manufacture of software discs
(including blank discs). Moreover, because of
variations in the quality of discs, this recorder may not
be able to record on all discs that bear a DVD-RAM,
DVD-RW or DVD-R logo, but you should not encounter
difficulty if you use only high quality recordable DVD
discs. Additionally, discs recorded in this device may not
operate properly in other DVD players, recorders and/or
personal computer drives. If you happen to encounter
difficulties playing or recording a DVD disc or playing a
CD disc, please feel free to call our Customer Service
Hotline at 1-800-319-6684.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM5
6
Introduction
Choosing a disc
When you want to play DVD or CD software or copy programs from the HDD to a recordable DVD, load an
appropriate disc into the recorder. There are many types and formats of discs. Please use the following
information to select an appropriate disc.
Disc
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Mark Specification Remarks
Single sided 4.7GB (12cm (4
3
/
4
in.))
Double sided 9.4GB (12cm (4
3
/
4
in.))
4.7GB For General Ver.2.0/2.1
(12cm (43/4 in.))
Ver. 1.1 or later (12cm
(43/4 in.))
Read carefully the section On DVD-RAM
discs ( page 8).
Select a DVD-RAM disc that shows a
statement on its package such as this disc
can be used with video recorders and drives
compatible with 4.7GB DVD-RAM discs or
this disc can copy images that permit single
copying.
Read carefully the section On DVD-R discs
( page 9).
Depending on the disc status or the
recording equipment, playback of the disc
may not be possible on this recorder.
Read carefully the section On DVD-RW
discs ( page 9).
Depending on the disc status or the
recording equipment, playback of the disc
may not be possible on this recorder.
Notes
Handle the disc according to the disc instruction manual.
Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and CD software and/or the manufacture of DVD
and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that this HDD/DVD Video Recorder will successfully play every disc bearing the DVD
and CD logos. Additionally, Toshiba cannot assure that discs recorded in this HDD/DVD Video Recorder will successfully
play in other DVD players, recorders and/or personal computer drives. If you happen to experience any difficulty playing a
DVD and/or CD disc on this HDD/DVD Video Recorder, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.
For recording / playback
Using different disc types for different purposes
DVD-RAM discs for your personal library
DVD-RAM discs comply with the global standard DVD-VR (Video Recording) format, and are optimized for recording of
TV programs. You can rewrite repeatedly without deterioration of an image quality, erase unnecessary parts, divide a
chapter, or specify playback area by frame. Its cartridge is suitable for a longer-term storage and family use, and its
large capacity of 9.4 GB allows more recording space.
DVD-R/RW discs when creating your own original discs for distribution
DVD-R discs are designed to comply with the global standard DVD-Video format, and can be recorded only once. DVD-
R discs are convenient when you edit your original content (recorded personal events such as a wedding party) with
this recorder, transfer them to the recorder and make copies to send to your friends or relatives. The discs can be
played on other compatible DVD players. DVD-RW discs, which are rewriteable, can be used as well.
*DVD-R and DVD-RW may not be the best suited format for recording TV programs. Because of the way the discs are
formatted, it may not be possible to edit or divide the program as you may prefer, to record secondary languages, or
programs that are copy protected in a way that allows only one copy. (NOTE: Copy once protected programs
generally can be recorded to DVD-RAM discs.)
*This recorder records on a DVD-R/RW disc in DVD-Video format only.
*On DVD-R/RW discs, direct recording, copying or the method Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ( page
112) are available.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM6
7
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
You cannot play discs other than those listed above.
You cannot play non-standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.
You cannot play discs with specialized encoding (such as SACD discs) or the DVD audio portions of DVD Audio
discs.
This recorder uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system
(PAL, SECAM, etc.), even if they have region marks
1
or
ALL
.
Toshiba cannot guarantee that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected. Please see the
discussion of compatibility on page 5.
For playback only
DVD video
disc
12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
Region number
1 or
ALL
Color system: NTSC
The region number of this DVD recorder is 1.
If region numbers, corresponding to a
specific playable area, are printed on your
DVD video disc and you do not find
1
or
ALL
, or the disc is encoded to permit
playback only in regions other than Region 1,
disc playback will not be allowed by the
recorder.
Disc Mark Specification Remarks
CD-R
CD-RW
VIDEO CD 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
Color system: NTSC
Version 1.1 and 2.0
Audio CD
12cm (43/4 in.)
CD-DA (audio CD) format
Depending on the disc status, playback may
not be possible.
12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
DIGITAL VIDEO
Toshiba is not liable for any damage or loss caused directly or indirectly by the malfunction of this recorder,
including, without limitation, any one of the following:
Failure to record contents intended to be recorded by the consumer.
Failure to edit contents as intended by the consumer.
When a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc created on this recorder is used (e.g., insertion, playback, recording or editing)
in another DVD player, recorder or personal computer drive.
When a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc that is used in the manner described in the immediately preceding bullet point is
used again in this recorder.
When a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc that was recorded in another DVD recorder, or in a personal computer drive is
used in this recorder.
Some functions such as Library may not work with personal computer discs.
Discs recorded in this recorder may not operate as expected on other DVD players, recorders or personal
computer drives.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM7
8
Introduction
On DVD-RAM discs
Use only DVD-RAM discs that comply with DVD-
RAM standard Version 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2.
The recorder cannot record on a disc formatted in any
other standard. When using such a disc, initialize it by
using the disc-format function of this recorder.
The recorder may not record, dub, or edit some DVD-
RAM discs, because they are edited/recorded with
another manufacturers equipment or PC, contain a
large number of titles, or have little remaining capacity.
Also, a DVD-RAM disc may not be edited or recorded
if its title contains still pictures.
DVD-RAM discs formatted in UDF2.0 on a PC are not
compatible with this recorder. Before using these
discs, initialize them on this recorder.
This recorder complies with current copyright
protection technology and can copy a disc only when
the disc permits copying once. When there is no
indication on the disc, copying will not be allowed.
Such an indication on a disc is required also for the
Library Management database.
DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are
recommended for recording.
Two types of DVD-RAM discs are
available: ones with cartridges and ones
without cartridges. You can use either of
them with this recorder, but the former
ones are recommended.
In order to record highly detailed data,
make sure the disc is clean. DVD-RAM discs with
cartridges are easier to handle in this regard.
Do not open the cartridge shutter. The disc may not
play, or may not be recorded or edited once it
becomes dirty.
There are two types of DVD-RAM cartridges;
removable (TYPE 2/4) and not removable (TYPE 1). It
is recommended you do not remove the disc even
when you can.
Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the
disc if it is absolutely necessary to remove the disc.
Some commercially available cartridge discs cannot
be recorded or edited once the inside discs are
removed.
To protect recorded contents
Slide the write-protect tab to
PROTECT with something small
enough. The disc can play, but
cannot be edited or erased. Refer
to the instructions that come with
the disc.
When using a disc without a
cartridge (commercially
available discs)
Discs without cartridges can easily
attract fingerprints and dust, which
is the reason they are not recommended. If you cannot
avoid using them, handle with proper care.
When you write in a title column on a disc, use a pen
with a soft tip. Do not use a pen with a hard tip, such
as a ballpoint pen.
Recommended discs
The following discs have been tested with this recorder:
9.4 GB double-sided cartridge: Panasonic 2X, 3X, 5X
4.7 GB single-sided cartridge: Panasonic 2X, 3X, 5X
Choosing a disc (Continued)
PROTECT
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM8
9
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
Marks on DVD video discs
The following are examples of marks and the meanings.
4:3
LB
16:9 LB
16:9 PS
2
2
3
Mark Meanings
Number of audio streams
recorded in the disc.
(2 streams such as English and
Japanese in this example.)
Number of subtitle languages
recorded in the disc.
(2 subtitle languages are
recorded in this example.)
Number of camera angles
recorded in the disc.
(3 camera angles are recorded in
this example.)
Pictures are recorded in the
standard picture shape
(4:3 aspect ratio).
Pictures are recorded in the letter
box picture shape (4:3 aspect
ratio with horizontal black bars in
the top and bottom of pictures).
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9
wide picture shape.
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will
display them in the letter box
style.
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9
wide picture shape.
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will
display them in the pan scan style
(one or both sides of pictures
are cut).
Actual picture shape may vary
depending on the aspect ratio or
mode selection of the TV.
On DVD-R discs
Standards
DVD-R for General Ver.2.0 discs can be used for
recording and playback.
Discs compatible with the following recording speeds
can also be used:
Ver. 2.0/2X
Ver. 2.0/4X
Ver. 2.0 or 2.1/8X
Ver. 2.0 or 2.1/16X
Select discs labeled for video, for recording, 120
min. etc.
Recording conditions
Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.
Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this
recorder can only be used to record copy-free
material.
DVD-VR mode recording is not possible.
Recommended discs
Thats (Taiyo-Yuden) 4X, 8X
Maxell 4X, 8X
On DVD-RW discs
Standards
Discs labeled DVD-RW Ver.1.1 or 1.2 can be used.
Discs compatible with the following recording speeds
can also be used:
Ver. 1.1/2X
Ver. 1.2/4X
Ver. 1.2/6X
Select discs labeled for video, for recording, 120
min. etc.
Recording conditions
Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.
Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this
recorder can only be used to record copy-free
material.
DVD-VR mode recording is not possible.
Recommended discs*
JVC 2X, 4X
*Operation has been confirmed with recommended discs
and tested disc, but some other discs may not be
usable.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM9
10
Introduction
Playback side
On handling discs
Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
Do not stick paper or tape to discs.
On cleaning discs
Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.
Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
objects on discs outside of their case may cause
warping.
Choosing a disc (Continued)
Structure of disc contents
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the
titles are subdivided into chapters.
VIDEO CDs/audio CDs are divided into tracks.
Title: Divided contents of a DVD video disc.
Roughly corresponds to a story title in short
stories.
Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds
to a chapter in a story.
Track: Divided contents of a VIDEO CD or an audio
CD.
Each title, chapter, or track is assigned a number, which
is called title number, chapter number, or track
number respectively.
Some discs may not have these numbers.
When you record on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, one
recording will always equal one title. You can divide a title
into several chapters by marking borders in it to facilitate
scene search.
DVD video disc
Title 1 Title 2
Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3Chapter 1
Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5
VIDEO CD / audio CD
Yes
Yes No
No
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM10
11
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
Discs and purposes
The table shows main functions which are available on this recorder per disc category.
This will help you choose discs.
Characteristics on this
recorder
For the first use
Recording a TV program
Erasing recorded contents
Recording additional content
on a recorded disc
Indexing recorded contents
Naming a title
Creating a thumbnail
Collecting favorite scenes
(Playlist Editing)
Making a new title from a Playlist
containing favorite scenes
(Copy within the same disc)
Playing contents recorded on
this recorder, on other devices
When a message appears and
the loaded disc cannot be
used:
DVD-RAM disc
Suitable for repeat use of the
disc, and data storage for
video library. Copy once
contents can be recorded
using a compatible disc.
No preparatory steps
required, however initializing
is recommended.
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Contents can be played on
any devices compatible with
DVD-RAM discs. Follow the
instruction of the device to
play.
Initialize the disc.
If it is still unusable, try to
execute DVD-RAM physical
Format.
DVD-RW disc
Suitable for saving data in
DVD-Video format to play on
compatible devices.
You can erase recorded
contents to use the disc
repeatedly.
Initialize the disc.
Ye s
Ye s
If the disc has been executed
DVD-Video finalizing
process, first cancel the
process then delete contents
.
Ye s
If the disc has been executed
DVD-Video finalizing
process, first cancel the
process then delete contents
.
Ye s
Ye s
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a recorded
disc, you cannot name a title or
create a thumbnail.
No
No
Execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on this
recorder. This process
makes the disc playable on
other compatible devices.
(Some models excepted.)
Initialize the disc.
DVD-R disc
Suitable for saving data in
DVD-Video format to play on
compatible devices.
Once you execute DVD-
Video finalizing process on a
recorded disc so that it can
be played on other players,
you cannot make additions,
corrections and deletions of
contents on the disc.
No preparatory steps
required.
Ye s
Ye s
Deleting contents cannot
restore the disc space.
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a
recorded disc, you cannot
delete contents of the disc.
Ye s
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a
recorded disc, you cannot
add contents to the disc.
Ye s
Ye s
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a recorded
disc, you cannot name a title or
create a thumbnail.
No
No
Execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on this
recorder. This process
makes the disc playable on
other compatible devices.
(Some models excepted.)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 06.3.20, 4:16 PM11
12
Introduction
Index to parts and controls
See pages with arrows for details.
Front panel
126
4
3579
11
8
10
12
13
20 19
18
17
14
15
16
qON/STANDBY button / ON/STANDBY indicator
page 20
Turns the power on/restores the unit in the
standby mode.
wHDD button/HDD indicator page 45, 50
Press this to operate the HDD.
eDVD button/DVD indicator page 45, 66
Press this to operate a disc inside the disc tray.
rTV Guide button page 23, 40
Starts/exits TV Guide On Screen®.
t / / / /Enter button
/ / / :
Moves highlight or changes value.
Enter:
Makes a selection or executes an action.
yHDMI indicator
Illuminates while the HDMI connection is verified.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
* The above illustration displays the front panel with the cover open. See the following page on how to open or close the cover.
uDisc tray page 20
Loads a disc into the disc drive.
i (OPEN/CLOSE) button page 20
Opens and closes the disc tray.
oFront panel display page 18
!0 Remote sensor page 18 in INSTALLATION
GUIDE
!1 (REC) button page 46
Starts recording.
!2 (SKIP) button
Skips to the next chapter or track. page 62
!3 (PAUSE) button
Stops playback or recording momentarily. page
47, 61
!4 (SKIP) button
Skips to the previous chapter or track. page 62
!5 (PLAY) button page 66
Starts playback.
!6 CH buttons page 20, 45
Selects the channel.
All operations can be possible from the supplied remote control.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM12
13
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
To open or close the cover on the front panel
Put your finger on the left edge of the cover and pull it
down to open.
Note
Do not place a heavy object on the cover while it is
open. Doing so may damage the recorder.
!7 (STOP) button page 50, 61
Stops playback or recording.
!8 TIME SLIP button/TIMESLIP indicator
page 68, 69
Selects the time slip mode.
Illuminates in the time slip mode.
!9 INPUT2 jacks page 49
Use this when recording from other input source
such as a VCR or a camcorder.
@0 DV IN terminal page 52
Use this when recording from a digital video
device such as a digital video camera.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM13
14
Index to parts and controls (Continued)
Introduction
Rear panel
14
3
26 75
9
11 10
8
tHDMI OUTPUT jack page 26 in
INSTALLATION GUIDE
Use this to connect the recorder to a HDMI
compatible TV or monitor.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
yVHF/UHF RF IN (FROM ANT.) input socket
page 20 in INSTALLATION GUIDE
Connects to an antenna or cable signal.
uVHF/UHF RF OUT (TO TV) output socket
page 20 in INSTALLATION GUIDE
Connects the supplied coaxial cable to a TV.
i INPUT1/INPUT3 jacks page 49
Use this to connect the recorder to output jacks of
external devices such as another player or
camcorder.
qAC IN socket page 21 in INSTALLATION
GUIDE
wVentilation fan
Do not block the ventilating holes.
eDIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM
OPTICAL jack page 29 in INSTALLATION
GUIDE
Use this to connect the recorder to an audio
receiver equipped with an optical digital audio
input jack.
rCOMPONENT OUTPUT jacks page 28 in
INSTALLATION GUIDE
Outputs video signals to a connected TV or
monitor.
Connects to a TV or monitor equipped with
component video jacks.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM14
15
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
oOUTPUT jacks page 21, 23, 24, 28 in
INSTALLATION GUIDE
Outputs video and audio signals to a connected
TV or amplifier.
!0 G-LINK jack page 25 in INSTALLATION
GUIDE
Connect the supplied G-LINK® cable to this jack if
you are connecting this recorder to a cable/
satellite box. If you use a cable box connected to
this recorder, the TV Guide On Screen® system
changes channels on your cable box via the
G-LINK® cable to download free program listings
for your area while the recorder is turned off. You
are also able to control your cable box using the
recorders remote control after you connect the
G-LINK® cable and go through the TV Guide On
Screen® setup. (TV Guide On Screen® system is
for cable box users only. Not available for satellite
box users.)
!1 LAN(10/100) port
For an optional connection to operate the recorder
via a PC.
See Network Navi ( page 142, 145, 146) for
details.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM15
16
Index to parts and controls (Continued)
Introduction
Remote control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
34
35
37 36
39
41
43
44
46
48
50
52
45
47
49
51
40
42
38
27
32
31
30
29
33
26
28
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
19
17
15
16
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM16
17
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
*1MENU
Use this to display a menu screen that is recorded on
a DVD video disc.
Operate the menu screen as the same manner as
Locating a title using the top menu ( page 66).
A menu screen is not recorded on some discs.
*2RETURN
Returns to the previous screen (the screen may be
specified depending on the disc).
Refer to the instructions of the disc.
OPEN/CLOSE button page 20
Buttons for TV operation page 50 in
INSTALLATION GUIDE
HDD button page 45, 50
TIMESLIP button page 68, 69
EASY NAVI button page 29
Info button page 23
Menu button page 23
SLOW button page 62
FRAME/ADJUST button page 62, 72
Direction buttons ( / / / ) page 60, 172
PAUSE button page 61, 62
REC button page 40, 46
button page 70
Number buttons page 45, 71
ON/STANDBY button page 20, 21
CH/Page buttons page 20, 23, 45
DVD button page 45, 66
INSTANT SKIP button page 61
INSTANT REPLAY button page 61
CONTENT MENU button page 60
TV Guide button page 23, 40
SKIP button page 62
PICTURE SEARCH button page 62
ENTER button page 23, 24, 60, 172
PLAY button page 66, 127
STOP button page 50, 61, 111
QUICK MENU button page 46, 92
button page 123
TOP MENU button page 66
MENU button*
1
RETURN button*
2
TV CODE button page 50 in
INSTALLATION GUIDE
T.SEARCH button page 71
ANGLE button page 67
SUBTITLE button page 67
ZOOM button page 70
P in P button page 70
FL SELECT button page 19
DIMMER button page 19
DISPLAY button page 78
REMAIN button page 33
SETUP button page 172
CLEAR button page 36
EDIT MENU button page 102, 113
AUDIO button page 72
LIBRARY button page 132
PROG/HDMI button page 26 in
INSTALLATION GUIDE
CHP DIVIDE button page 87
REC MODE button page 45
INPUT SELECT button page 50
TIME BAR button page 79
DELETE button page 55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM17
18
Index to parts and controls (Continued)
Introduction
Display
qPBC indicator
Illuminates when a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD is
loaded.
wProgram recording indicator
Illuminates when the recorder holds a timer
program.
eBit rate indicator
Illuminates when displaying the bit rate selected
for recording, or when displaying the actual bit
rate.
rREMAIN (Remaining space) indicator
Illuminates when an available recording time is
displayed.
tVCD/CD indicator
VCD : Illuminates when a VIDEO CD is loaded.
CD : Illuminates when an audio CD is loaded.
yDVD-RAM indicator
Illuminates when a DVD-RAM disc is loaded.
1 3 4 5 8 96 7
10
2
15 17
11 12 1413 16
uDVD-RW/R indicator
Illuminates when a DVD-RW/R disc is loaded.
iCHP (Chapter) indicator
Illuminates when a chapter number is displayed.
oSAP indicator
Illuminates when receiving a SAP broadcast.
!0 Angle icon page 67
Illuminates when playing a scene recorded with
multi angles.
!1 DUB (Dubbing) indicator
Illuminates when copying.
!2 PROGRESSIVE indicator
Illuminates when video signals are output in the
progressive format.
!3 Picture quality mode indicator page 183
The current picture quality mode lights up.
The modes are: MN (Manual)/SP (Standard Play)/
LP (Long Play)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM18
19
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
Dimming the display
Pressing DIMMER button on the remote control changes the brightness of the display (normal/dimmed/off).
Switching the display
Every time you press FL SELECT button, the display changes between the channel, title number, and time.
The display may not change, depending on the disc or recording conditions.
!4 TITLE indicator
Illuminates when a title number is displayed.
!5 TRK (Track) indicator
Illuminates when a track number is displayed.
!6 Channel indicator
Displays the current channel or other numbers
such as a title number, track number, bit rate or
input selection.
!7 Multi display
Displays the current time, elapsed time, remaining
time, starting time of programmed recording, chapter
number or message, etc.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 06.3.20, 4:16 PM19
20
Is your recorder ready?
Refer to INSTALLATION GUIDE manual and finish
the necessary preparations.
Turn on the connected equipment such as a TV or
audio system and select the input from the recorder.
Turning the power on
(This owners manual instructions are based on
the premise that all proper connections have been
completed and the TV is turned on.)
Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the
recorder or on the remote control.
When the power turns on, the ON/STANDBY indicator
changes from red (standby mode) to green (operation).
After a few seconds, a start-up screen appears.
The following icon appears at the top right corner of
the screen.
When this icon disappears, the recorder is ready to
operate. If the disc drive contains a disc, it takes a
little longer to start up.
Viewing TV channels through this recorder
After turning the power on, the recorder will output TV
channel signals to the connected TV (also in the stop
mode).
You can select a desired channel by pressing the CH/
Page or the number buttons.
Loading a disc
Check disc compatibility beforehand ( page 6, 7)
and use a proper playable disc.
Caution
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray. Neglecting this
may cause serious personal injury. Keep a close watch on
children.
Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.
1 Open the disc tray.
Press on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE
button on the remote control.
2 Insert a disc.
Disc without a cartridge
Insert with the playback side down.
There are two kinds of disc size. Place a disc to fit
the dish. If a disc is out of the dish, it may result in
damage to the disc or malfunction.
Place a disc in the
inside hollow.
Introduction
Before operating this recorder
Loading
e.g.
ON/STANDBY button
CH/Page buttons
ON/STANDBY button/
ON/STANDBY indicator
OPEN/CLOSE button
button
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM20
21
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
DVD-RAM disc with cartridge (TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE4)
Single sided
Turn the printed side up, and insert the cartridge
into the tray frame following the direction of the
arrow on the cartridge.
Double sided
Turn the desired recording/playback side up, and
insert the cartridge into the tray frame following the
direction of the arrow on the cartridge.
3 Close the disc tray.
Press on the front panel or OPEN/CLOSE
button on the remote control.
Notes
Use the button on the front panel or the remote control to
open and close the disc tray. Do not push or hold the disc
tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the recorder to
malfunction.
Do not insert a disc which is unplayable, or any object
other than a playable disc.
Do not apply downforce to the disc tray. Doing so may
cause the recorder to malfunction.
If the disc tray stops while closing, the mechanical
protection system of this recorder will open it. Do not force
it to close. Doing so may cause malfunction.
If the disc tray would not open, turn the recorder off, and
press button on the front panel or OPEN/CLOSE button
on the remote control. This may turn the recorder on and
open the disc tray. If it still wouldnt open, contact your
nearest TOSHIBA dealer.
Turning the power off
Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the
recorder or on the remote control.
The Unloading icon appears at the top right corner of
the screen, and ON/STANDBY indicator turns red,
then the power turns off (Standby mode.)
Caution
If the power fails or the power cord is disconnected from a
wall outlet while the recorder is in operation (ON/STANDBY
indicator lit in green), the HDD or a loaded disc may
become recording disabled. In such a case, executing an
initialization of the disc using the formatting function of the
recorder may refresh it. However, all contents stored on
the disc will be completely erased by this initialization
process.
This recorder may indicate alert messages with some
DVD-RAM discs right after insertion. If such a disc is used
for playback or recording on other equipment, all data in
the disc may be damaged and the disc will not be played.
By executing an initialization of the disc using the
formatting function of the recorder, the disc will become
operational.
If the recorder freezes and does not respond at all, leave it
alone for about 15 minutes or longer. This may restore the
recorder. After the recorder has recovered, turn it off once
and turn it on again to use as usual. If the recorder is still
inoperable after more than 15 minutes have passed, press
and hold the ON/STANDBY button on the front panel for
about 10 seconds or longer. The recorder is forced to quit
and the power turns off. Turn the recorder on again and
use it as usual. (This is an emergency measure, which
may cause losses and/or damages of data. Avoid casual
use of this measure. If you try this while the recorder is
working properly, especially while the Loading or
Unloading icon is flashing, it may result in initializing of
the HDD.) (This 15-minute measure is available only when
Screen protector is set to On. ( page 181))
Note
If there are any performance malfunctions of the HDD or
the DVD-RAM drive, immediately discontinue use of this
recorder, and disconnect the power cord from a wall outlet,
then contact your dealer. Continuous use of the recorder in
such a condition will aggravate the condition and result in
increased cost and repair time.
Disc tray lock (Child lock)
You can lock the disc tray.
Press and hold PAUSE on the remote control for
longer than about 3 seconds.
To unlock, press the button for longer than about 3
seconds.
Note
Turning the power off also unlocks the disc tray.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM21
22
Introduction
Before operating this recorder (Continued)
Loading
Open
Un
loading
Close
Start-up/Shutdown (closing) icons
These icons are displayed at the top right corner of
the screen when startup or finishing. While they are
flashing, the recorder is operating as follows:
Start-up, reading a disc, finishing the
recording
Unloading a disc, finishing the
operation
Opening a disc tray
Closing a disc tray
Status display
Status display
Each time you operate the recorder, the following
displays appear on the TV screen to indicate the
status of the recorder.
e.g.
Main on-screen displays
(Depending on the disc, some of these may not
appear.)
: Playback
: Pause
: Stop
: Fast-forward*
: Fast-reverse*
: Forward skip**
: Reverse skip**
: Forward slow-motion
: Reverse slow-motion
: Forward frame by frame playback
: Reverse frame by frame playback
: Recording
: Recording pause
: When title playback is completed
: Instant skip
: Instant replay
: Chapter division
: Forward skip by 1/20
: Reverse skip by 1/20
*The number of the mark varies according to the
playback speed you select.
** Accompanied with the followings:
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
:
Title number/title name and chapter number/
chapter name
DVD-VIDEO
:
Title number and chapter number
VCD CD
:
Track number
Notes
To disable the status display, set On screen display
( page 181) to Off.
You can add the current status of the settings to this
display. See page 78.
x1/2
Title
End
Chapter
Divide
x1/2
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM22
23
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
Using TV Guide On Screen
®
The TV Guide On Screen system in your recorder is a free interactive program guide that provides up to
8 days of program listings for over-the-air, cable-ready and analog cable in your area. The system allows
you to easily find, set up reminders and schedule recordings of your favorite TV programs.
When using a satellite box, TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS service is not available for changing channels
for TV viewing or setting recordings.
Only manual timer recordings are available. Please see page 43 for instructions.
Introduction
Entering TV Guide On Screen mode
Press TV Guide.
TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS service
is displayed.
In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV GUIDE International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates.
In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transcontinental Inc., and is used under license by Gemstar-TV GUIDE International, Inc.
The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates.
The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877,
6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.
Info Box
Video window Main service
Buttons in TV Guide On Screen
mode
/ / / :
Moves the highlight.
ENTER:
Makes a selection or executes an action.
Menu:
Displays a Panel Menu with options.
Info: (while
INFO
is displayed)
Changes the Info Box size.
Opens a Help screen when you move
the highlight on the service bar.
CH/Page:
Scrolls one page up or down in the
LISTINGS service.
The LISTINGS service contains a list of up to 8 days of TV
programs including today.
To view a TV program
Press / to select a TV program and press ENTER.
To view information of a TV program
Press / to select a TV program and press Info.
To close the Info Box, press Info twice.
To access options (e.g., recording, reminder, etc.)
See the next page.
You also have access to the following services besides the LISTINGS
service. While on the Main service bar select a service by pressing / ,
then press ENTER. If you press Info while a service is highlighted, an Info
box opens to show you more information about the service. Follow any
instructions provided. For details, see the next page.
RECORDINGS
List all shows recorded through the TV Guide On Screen system.
SEARCH
Sort by keyword, movies, sports, HDTV, and more.
SCHEDULE
Review, add or modify scheduled recordings and reminders.
SETUP
Change the TV Guide On Screen defaults to your preference or redo.
the setup
Notes
To exiting TV Guide On Screen mode, press TV Guide.
While the TV Guide On Screen system is displayed other menus (e.g. EASY
NAVI, CONTENT MENU, EDIT MENU, LIBRARY MENU) are not available.
To use these menus, exit the TV Guide On Screen system.
ENTER
Info
Menu
TV Guide
CH/Page
/ / /
HDD
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
RECORDINGS SEARCHLISTINGS
3:19News
Press Menu now for Listings Options
Move to highlight any show
Press Enter to tune to current show in glid
Press Menu for more current show options
INFO
TODAY 3:00AM 3:30AM
News Nightline
Rainfield Limpsons
News Dave Live
News Jay Lean
Charles Rose
Fisher Spin Town
Everybody
l
oves Bi
ll
&Greg
BOX
GBS
QBS
bcd
Welcome
T
V
G
UIDE
O
N
S
CREEN
to
T
V
G
UIDE
O
N
S
CREEN
select for more information
T
V
G
UIDE
O
N
S
CREEN
Using
e.g.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM23
24
Introduction
Using TV Guide On Screen
®
(Continued)
LISTINGS
If you select a TV program and press Menu, a panel menu appears under the video window.
Press / to select an option then press ENTER.
go to Service Bar
watch now
set recording
set reminder
cancel
e.g.
Closes the menu, changes no information, and returns a Highlight to the
Service Bar.
The selected TV program appears in a full screen.
You can set the TV program to record. See page 40.
You can set a reminder to the TV program. See page 26.
Changes are canceled and this menu is closed.
e.g.
schedule reminder
frequency
auto tune TV
when
Your selections below are entered and this menu is closed.
Press / to select the frequency.
Press / to select whether to tune to the channel.
Press / to select the time you want the reminder to appear.
Tips on panel menu operation
/ buttons move a highlight. If you see “ ” or “ ” on the top or bottom of a panel menu, CH/Page buttons can be
used to turn the page.
To enter a digit, use the number buttons.
When a box has “ ” and “ ” on both sides, use / buttons to cycles between the options.
Press ENTER from an option to highlight the default command button (e.g., done). Press ENTER again to execute the
action and close the panel menu.
To cancel any changes and close the menu, press Menu, or select Cancel then press ENTER.
Notes
You can set the video window to remain on a single channel (lock) or change channels (unlock) as you navigate through
LISTINGS. With a channel logo or LISTINGS is highlighted, press Menu button to display the option to select lock or
unlock.
You can access a TV program advertised in a panel ad. While the panel ad is highlighted press ENTER. If the TV program is
airing now, you would tune to it. A panel menu appears, if the program is in the future.
Services and options
For more details press Info while navigating through the various options and services.
SEARCH
If you select this service and press ENTER, categories appear on a bar under the Service Bar.
By selecting one of the categories, you can search TV programs.
After searching, you can open Episode Options by pressing Menu to access the options (above).
To search by Search type (Alphabetical, HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children, Educational, News, Variety,
Series)
1) Press / to select a Search type.
2) Press / to select a category, then press ENTER.
Episode Options
go to Service Bar
watch now
set recording
set reminder
cancel
Remind Options
once
1 min early
when
frequency
cancel
schedule reminder
no
auto tune TV
Note
Please note that over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide On Screen® data is required for the TV Guide On
Screen® system to operate. TV Guide On Screen® does not work with satellite programming. Toshiba does not provide the TV
Guide On Screen® data. Instead, the data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for the accuracy and availability of
the data. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may exist between the TV Guide On Screen® system contained in your
HDD/DVD Video Recorder and the data provided by the third party. In the event that you experience any performance issues
with your TV Guide On Screen® system, please do not hesitate to contact the Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
Consumer Solutions Department by calling (800) 631-3811 or by visiting http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM24
25
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
To search by entering a keyword
1) Press / to select KEYWORD then press ENTER.
Keyword Search appears.
2) Press / to select new search then press ENTER.
Search Options appears.
3) Press / to select category then press / to select a category.
4) Press / to select enter keyword then press ENTER.
The keyboard appears.
5) Press / / / to enter a keyword.
Press / to select a entry point then press ENTER.
The selected letter is entered.
6) When complete, press / / / to select DONE then press ENTER.
A list of all matching TV programs for that keyword is displayed.
RECORDINGS
If you select this service and press ENTER, TV programs previously recorded or currently recording are listed.
You can select one from the list to view or delete.
To list programs in alphabetical order or by date and time
1) While RECORDINGS is highlighted, press Menu.
Recordings Options appears.
2) Press / to select an option.
Press / / / to select then press ENTER.
The text entry box is highlighted.
BKSP erases a letter on the left of the cursor.
DEL erases a letter on the right of the cursor.
SPACE inserts a space on the left of the cursor.
CLR erases all letters.
view as
sort by
Press / to select.
group: Titles of recorded TV programs are listed.
list: Displays a detailed list of every recorded program.
Press / to select.
title: Listed in alphabetical order
date: Listed by date and time, with most recent date and time first.
e.g.
e.g.
3) When complete, press / to select done then press ENTER.
A list of all matching TV programs for that keyword is displayed.
Recordings Options
group
title
sort by
view as
cancel
done
go to Service Bar
STUVWX
YZ 0 1 2 3
4
BKSP DEL CLR
'
5
SPACE
DONE
CAL
CANCEL
6789
.
AB C D E F
GH I J K L
MN O P Q R
To play recorded program (view as is set to group)
1) Press / to select a TV program then press ENTER.
2) Press to select an episode and press ENTER.
Notes
If you play a TV program which you played before, playback starts from where you last stopped. To view it from the beginning,
select the TV program on RECORDINGS, then press ENTER and to select an episode then Menu. On Episode Options
select play from beginning then press ENTER.
When view as is set to list, press / to select a TV program, then press ENTER.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM25
26
Introduction
Using TV Guide On Screen
®
(Continued)
To delete recorded programs (view as is set to group)
1) Press / to select a TV program and press ENTER.
2) Press to select an episode and press Menu.
Episode Options appears.
3) Press / to select delete episode then press ENTER.
A confirming menu appears.
4) Press / to select yes or no then press ENTER.
Note
When view as is set to list, press / to select a TV program and Menu. On Episode Options, press / to select
delete episode then ENTER. Press / to select yes or no then ENTER.
SCHEDULE
If you select this service and press ENTER, reminder and recordings you set previously are listed.
You can edit or delete them.
1) Press / to select a TV program.
2) Press Menu.
Schedule Options appears.
3) Press / to select then press ENTER.
Schedule Options
go to Service Bar
tune to channel
delete recording
edit recording
cancel
set reminder
delete recording
(delete reminder)
edit recording
(set recording)
set reminder
(edit reminder)
A confirming menu appears.
Press / to select yes or no then press ENTER.
Opens a menu.
For a recording, see page 43.
You can set a reminder manually. See below.
e.g.
schedule reminder
date
start
end
channel
input
auto tune TV
frequency
Your selections below are entered and this menu is closed.
Press the number buttons to input the date (month, day, year).
To shift the highlight, press / .
Press the number buttons or / to input the time (hour, minute, am/pm).
To shift the highlight, press / .
Press the number buttons to input a channel number.
Press / to select the input.
Press / to select whether the TV is automatically tuned to the
channel you have selected.
Press / to select the frequency.
e.g.
Notes
When a reminder message appears, select an option by pressing / and then press ENTER. If you dont make a selection
within 30 seconds, the recorder proceeds with the scheduled recording or reminder.
If reminders conflict, REMINDER CONFLICT! appears. Press / to select an option, then press ENTER.
once
TUNER
input
frequency
cancel
schedule reminder
date
start
end
channel
pm
pm
07 14 05
01 00
02 00
11
no
auto tune TV
Remind Options
Schedule Options
go to Service Bar
new manual recording
new manual reminder
cancel
done
date
sort by
e.g.
sort by
new manual recording
new manual reminder
Press / to select how you display the list. (date, title, event)
You can set recording manually. See page 43.
You can set a reminder manually. See below.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM26
27
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
SETUP
If you select this service and press ENTER, options to change settings are listed.
To execute the setup again
1) Press / to select Change system settings then press ENTER.
Your current settings are displayed.
2) Press / to select your answer then press ENTER.
3) Follow the on-screen guidance.
To arrange the position the channel appears in LISTINGS
To change the tuning channel number
To switch channels on/off in LISTINGS
1) Press / to select Change channel display then press ENTER.
Grid Options appears.
2) Press / to select a channel then press Menu.
3) Press / to select then press ENTER.
4) When complete, press / to select done then press ENTER.
To change Info Box size
1) Press / to select Change default options then press ENTER.
2) Press / to select General defaults then press Menu.
General Defaults appears.
Grid Options
cancel
done
go back to Setup
Air
service
on
tune channel
channel
position
1
8
channel
service
tune channel
position
Press / to select on or off.
on: the channel is always displayed.
off: the channel is never displayed.
auto-hide: the channel hides automatically.
Press / to select the signal type of the channel.
Press the number button to enter a channel.
Press the number button to enter a desired position for the channel in
LISTINGS.
e.g.
3) Press / to select then press ENTER.
4) When complete, press / to select done then press ENTER.
i box size
box cycle
auto guide
Press / to select the initial size of the Info Box.
Press / to select the size rotation when Info is pressed.
Press / to select whether the recorder enters TV Guide On
Screen system when powered on.
e.g.
General Defaults
cancel
done
go to Service Bar
last used
box size
all
box cycle
on
auto guide
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM27
28
Introduction
Using TV Guide On Screen
®
(Continued)
To change recording defaults
1) Press / to select Change default options then press ENTER.
2) Press / to select Record defaults then press Menu.
Record Defaults appears.
Record Defaults
cancel
done
go to Service Bar
1 min early
start
end
HDD
recorder
EXP-Audio
quality
2 min late
e.g.
start
end
recorder
quality
Press / to select the time to start recording.
Press / to select the time to end recording.
Press / to select the drive.
Press / to select the recording mode.
(For details, see page 42.)
3) When complete, press / to select done then press ENTER.
To change reminder defaults
1) Press / to select Change default options then press ENTER.
2) Press / to select Remind defaults then press Menu.
Remind Defaults appears.
Remind Defaults
cancel
done
go to Service Bar
2 min early
when
yes
auto tune TV
e.g.
auto tune TV
when
Press / to select whether the channel is automatically tuned to
the channel you have selected.
Press / to select the time you want the reminder to appear.
3) When complete, press / to select done then press ENTER.
Note on watching TV with TV Guide On Screen
If you leave the recorder turned on without executing any action for about 3 hours, a message will appear on the TV
asking you want to continue watching TV.
If you want to continue watching TV, press ENTER.
If you do not press ENTER, the recorder will automatically turn off within about 10 minutes.
Notes
As the number of recorded TV programs increases, it may take several minutes for the TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS
service to be displayed. In addition, conditions of the recorder can also vary the loading time.
The TV Guide On Screen menus shown in this manual are for illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and TV
Guide On Screen information as illustrated may not be available in your area, may be subject to change.
Gemstar-TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the
program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarantee service availability in
your area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in
connection with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen
system.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM28
29
Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup
Introduction Others
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU
The EASY NAVI button opens “EASY NAVI Main Menu”, a main gate to the functions of this recorder.
From this menu, you can access the desired functions while viewing a current picture.
Additionally, QUICK MENU button provides you a sub menu of the current function.
EASY NAVI
Press EASY NAVI.
Sound is muted and the following GUI appears. (Actual displays vary depending on operational status.)
Introduction
Item selection
Press / / / to select an item, then press ENTER.
(Unavailable features are grayed out.)
Operating the finder (For the HDD, DVD-RAM discs, DVD-R/RW
discs recorded on this recorder and not finalized yet)
1) When the cursor is on the finder, press / .
You can view thumbnails of recorded contents.
You can select the drive by pressing HDD or DVD button.
2) When you find a desired content, press PLAY or ENTER.
The content is played.
Pressing ENTER button enlarges the finder’s playback picture to the
full of the screen.
You can change playback speed. See page 62.
3) To stop, press STOP.
A current channel broadcast appears. (TV:xxxch accompanies.)
Pressing REC button starts recording. On recording, see page
32.
ENTER
PLAY
STOP
EASY NAVI
HDD/DVD
/ / /
005 2006/03/24 07:00am TV:18
TV:12ch
Original
(00:54:30)
00:10:15
HDD
Play Time Time Slip
TR
TV Viewing
Delete Title
Finalize (R/RW) Format (RAM/RW)
Dubbing
Setup
TV Guide On Screen®
Play Contents
DV Recording
Main Menu
HDD
NAVI
EASY
Disc
Recorded title
last selected
Functions
Appears when the finder shows
the current broadcast.
Finder
Cursor
e.g.
(Continued)
Item Function
60
26
52
55
100
34
172
122
page
Return to current broadcast channel.
Recorded contents are listed in a thumbnail view.
TV Guide On Screen SCHEDULE appears.
The setting menu for recording contents from equipment
connected to the DV IN terminal.
You can delete the current content.
Operate according to the message.
You can access a menu to dub the current content.
You can execute the DVD-Video finalizing process on the
loaded disc.
You can format the loaded disc.
A setup menu appears.
Delete Title
Finalize (R/RW)
Format (RAM/RW)
Setup
Dubbing
TV Viewing
TV Guide On Screen®
Play Contents
DV Recording
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.22, 4:09 PM29
30
Quick Menu operation
To access various optional functions of this recorder,
open Quick Menu. Quick Menu displays a list of
selections relevant to your current mode.
Opening Quick Menu
1) Press QUICK MENU.
The following menu (Quick Menu) appears.
(Actual selections vary depending on operational
status.)
2) Press / to select an item, then press
ENTER.
To exit Quick Menu
Press QUICK MENU again.
Alternatively
Select Exit with / , then press ENTER.
To exit the EASY NAVI
Press EASY NAVI again.
Note
For a disc other than the specified one, the finder cannot
be operated. To play the disc, exit the EASY NAVI then
press the PLAY button, or select the Play Contents
function.
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Restart title
Exit
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Introduction
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU (Continued)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 06.3.20, 4:16 PM30
Recording
Recording variations for many types of programs or
situations.
Before recording
Setting a timer recording using
TV Guide On Screen®
Recording a TV program
Recording an external source
DV recording (Recording from a
digital video camera)
Deleting recorded contents
Others
Hint on reading this manual
The following icons show the playable discs for each
function described on this instruction manual.
: HDD
: DVD-RAM disc
: DVD-RW disc
: DVD-R disc
: DVD video disc
: VIDEO CD
: Audio CD
(For CD containing JPEG or MP3/WMA files,
see page 74, 76.)
Most instructions are based on remote control operation,
unless otherwise noted. You can use the buttons on the
remote control and those on the main unit as well when
they have the same function.
If copy protection signal is detected during
recording on this recorder, the recording
automatically pauses and a message appears. In
this case, the PAUSE button cannot release the
recording. (It is possible to end the recording by
pressing the STOP button.) If the copy protection
signal continues, the recording will terminate.
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RW
DVD-R
VCD
CD
DVD-VIDEO
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM31
32
This recorder is equipped with a built-in HDD. Conventional video cassette recorders have required
tapes to record, while this recorder enables recording on the HDD whenever you want, without
selecting an available tape or confirming its recording time or tape remaining.
Further, the DVD-RAM drive on this recorder can record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc in the same way as
a tape. You can also copy contents recorded on the HDD to a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc to create your
own library.
Is your recorder ready?
Before recording a TV program on this recorder,
insure that channels you want to record are correctly
tuned in on this recorder.
If not tuned in, read the separate INSTALLATION
GUIDE volume again, and confirm all the necessary
connections and settings have been done.
Also, insure the clock is set precisely for program
recording.
Disc initializing
Whenever you use a new DVD-RAM disc on this
recorder, be sure to initialize the disc. For DVD-RAM
discs, initialization is indispensable to the database
system of this recorder.
Normally, the HDD does not need to be formatted. If
the HDD does not work normally due to a problem,
format the HDD for possible recovery. Once you
format the HDD, all the recorded titles and Library
information are deleted. Before formatting, be sure to
write library information to a DVD-RAM disc and check
any titles to be deleted.
DVD-RW discs can be emptied by initializing.
DVD-R discs can be used on this recorder without
initializing.
For details of initialization of DVD-RAM discs, see
page 34.
If an initialized DVD-RAM disc is still unusable, it may
become usable by executing DVD-RAM physical
format in Management settings menu.
For DVD-RAM physical format, see page 35.
Note on recording on a DVD-RAM disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
DVD-RAM disc to record on ( page 6, 8).
Some discs may need to be formatted for use on this
recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute
disc formatting. Follow the procedure displayed on-
screen to format the DVD-RAM disc compatible with
this recorder.
Some DVD-RAM discs formatted on a PC may not be
usable.
Note
This recorder records on a DVD-RAM disc if it complies
with DVD-RAM standard Version 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2. However,
you may not record on some DVD-RAM discs that have
complicated contents (often, to protect the recorded data).
When you select a DVD-RAM disc that has already been
recorded, check that the disc is suitable for recording or
the remaining time of the disc is displayed. It is
recommended to use a new DVD-RAM disc for an
important recording.
Note on recording on a DVD-RW disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
DVD-RW disc to record on ( page 6, 9).
Some discs may need to be initialized for use on the
recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute
disc initializing. Follow the procedure displayed on-
screen for initializing the DVD-RW disc compatible
with this recorder.
Some DVD-RW discs initialized on a PC may not be
usable.
To play a DVD-RW disc recorded on this recorder on
an other device, finalize the DVD-RW disc on this
recorder. ( page 122)
The finalization disables the discs rewritability. To
rewrite a finalized DVD-RW disc, cancel the
finalization ( page 125).
On DVD-RW discs recorded on other devices, you
cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or
cancel the finalize process, or add recordings on
this recorder.
DVD-RW discs which are recorded on other devices
and not finalized yet, cannot be read on this
recorder. Do not rush to initialization. Check that the
contents can be erased or not.
Recording
Before recording
Please be sure to read this critical background information prior to making a recording.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM32
33
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Note on recording on a DVD-R disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
DVD-R disc to record on ( page 6, 9).
To play a DVD-R disc recorded on this recorder on
other devices, finalize the DVD-R disc on this
recorder. ( page 122)
The finalization permanently disables the discs
writeability. (Canceling the finalization is not possible.)
DVD-Video finalize process cannot be canceled if
once executed on a DVD-R disc.
On DVD-R discs recorded on other devices, you
cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or add
recordings on this recorder.
DVD-R discs with the method of DVD-Video
Creation have been alreadly executed the DVD-
Video finalize process. Therefore, they cannot be
added the contents.
If you want to record contents which will be copied
to a DVD-R/RW disc later on
See page 48.
To check space remaining on a disc
1) Press REMAIN.
The current capacity per disc is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. The current capacity of the
selected drive is displayed on the front panel display.
2) After checking the capacity, press REMAIN again
to turn off the display.
When HDD recording is not possible due to...
appears
The HDD is full. To record new content, delete
unnecessary titles or transfer some content to a DVD-
RAM disc.
Notes
The Loading icon appears in the top right of the screen after recording. This indicates that the unit is executing
the final recording process (writing managing information). Operations other than changing channels cannot be
done until this icon disappears. The time for executing this process differs depending on the recording time or
capacity of the disc.
Note that all recording content may be deleted if the unit is disconnected from a wall outlet, or a power failure
occurs, during recording.
If a power failure occurs within 5 minutes prior to the programed recording start time, the programmed recording
may not be executed.
Programmed recording and operational status
The recorder gives priority to programmed recordings
in every operating mode. Even if the recorder is
playing, recording or editing, or even in standby mode,
at a starting time of a programmed recording the
recorder will make itself ready or stop those
operations and start the recording.
However, Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW
( page 112) and DVD-Video finalizing process
( page 122) operations may have priority over
programmed recordings.
When the programmed settings overlap
Before the first recording is completed, the second
program is scheduled to begin recording. When using
a DVD-RAM disc, the recording of the previous
program stops 10 seconds before the next program
starts. (If you have been recording over 9 hours on the
same drive, the current recording stops approximately
2 minutes before the next programme starts.)
When using a DVD-R/RW disc, the recording of the
previous program stops about 2 minutes before the
next program starts, to complete data process. In this
2 minutes, you cannot operate the loaded DVD-R/RW
disc.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM33
34
How to initialize a disc
To initialize a DVD-RAM disc, load it in the recorder.
See page 20 for loading a disc.
1) Press QUICK MENU.
The following menu appears. (The actual contents
depends on the operational status of the recorder.)
2) Press / to select Disc management, then
press ENTER.
A sub menu appears on the right side.
3) Press / to select DVD format, then press
ENTER.
Numbering a disc
The recorder automatically numbers discs when
initializing. However, you can assign a desired number
(using 3 digits) and designate sides A and B on a double-
sided disc. (DVD-RW discs cannot be numbered.)
(1) Press / buttons to select Edit of Disc Number
then press the ENTER button.
(2) Press / buttons to select a digit.
(3) Press / buttons to shift.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3).
(5) Press ENTER button.
Naming a disc
You can name a disc.
(1) Press / buttons to select Edit of Disc Name,
then press ENTER button.
The character input window appears.
(2) Enter a disc name following the procedure of
Entering characters ( page 36).
(3) Press button to eliminate the window.
Before recording (Continued)
Recording
Be sure to read this section prior to using a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder for the first time.
For DVD-R, initializing is not necessary.
Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical format)
A disc should be initialized in the following cases: (The
recorder may display a message to request you to do
so.)
e.g.
When you use a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder
for the first time.
If data fragments produced by repeated recording or
erasing have accumulated.
If a disc error has occurred.
When you want to record on a DVD-RAM disc for PC.
( page 8)
Initializing formats a disc logically and insures that it will
perform to its full capability. However, this erases all data
on the disc, so make sure that it does not matter if data
on the disc is erased whenever you initialize a disc.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
User record quality
SAP
Exit
e.g.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
User record quality
SAP
Exit
Disc information
DVD format
e.g.
%
0
DV D format
0 0 1
Disc Number
Disc Name
Start Cancel
Edit
Edit
Format
e.g.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM34
35
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
DVD-RAM physical format
Physical formatting is a simple execution for a disc which
cannot be used or read (or which is becoming hard to
read). It may refresh such a disc for recording and
playback. (There is no guarantee that all such discs will
be recovered.)
DVD-RAM logical format process only rewrites certain
data on file system and management information,
however, DVD-RAM physical format rewrites all data on
a disc, therefore it takes a much longer time to complete.
For a 4.7GB single sided DVD-RAM, about 70 minutes
will be necessary. While processing, all recorder
operations and functions including program recording will
not work until the process is finished. Also this process
erases all data stored on the DVD-RAM disc.
Notes
The physical format process may fail if executed to a dirty
DVD-RAM disc. Also, the disc may be difficult to record,
even if it is finished. Before executing DVD-RAM physical
format process, be sure to confirm the disc is not dirty.
Clean it if necessary. If the disc has scratches or dust
beyond cleaners efficacy, do not execute DVD-RAM
physical format process on the disc.
The following DVD-RAM discs require physical formatting:
A disc which is not formatted correctly.
The disc which has errors during writing because of dirt
on the disc, and cannot be further recorded, or cannot
initialize normally.
You need to start physical formatting from the first step
again when you use a failed disc.
Physical formatting does not work if the disc contains a lot
of voids beyond the limitation of this recorder.
If an error occurs in physical formatting, ERR-01 appears
in the front panel display. To turn off the message, press
DISPLAY button on the remote control.
4) Press / to select Start, then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select Start, then press ENTER.
Initialization starts.
When the initialization is completed, the setup
window disappears.
1) Press SETUP.
2) Press / to select Management settings
then press ENTER.
3) Press / to select DVD-RAM Physical
Format, then press ENTER.
4) Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER to
execute.
To cancel, select No, then press ENTER button.
5) Read the message, and press / to select
Yes or No, then press ENTER.
Yes
No
Warning: It will take approximately
70 minutes to format a 4.7GB
DVD-RAM and all data will be erased.
Confirm t
hat timer programing is not
scheduled.
Proceed?
Format
0
DV D format
Start
Entire disc contents excluding
library data will be erased
if disc is formatted. Proceed?
Cancel
%
e.g.
18
DV D format
Format
DVD
Formatting
%
e.g.
SETUP
e.g.
HDD auto stop
All HDD titles delete
Front Display
Off
Off
High speed
xxxx/xxxx
Management settings
DVD-RAM physical format
DVD Drive speed setting
Version (Main/DVD drive)
HDD format
Network Setting
Genre setting
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM35
36
Before recording (Continued)
Recording
Entering characters
Operation guidance of the remote control
To enter the character, normally use / / /
buttons on the remote. About the other buttons to be
used are shown on the operation guide.
: Shifts the cursor.
: Enters a number.
: Erases one character immediately to the left
side of the cursor.
: Erases all the characters.
: Caps Lock
: Saves the changes and returns to the
previous screen.
: Cancels the changes and returns to the
previous screen.
: Enters a space.
: Enters a symbol.
Switching a language
Before entering a character, move a cursor to the
language selection area by pressing / buttons.
Then press / buttons to select a language, then
press ENTER button.
Title information
MENU
CONTENT
003
Chapter
English
Spanish
French
German
Italian
etc...
Input 12 3
456
789
Select
ReturnSave@
Caps Lock :Space
All ClearBkSp
Direct(0-9)
Cursor
CLEARCLEAR
INSTANT SKIPINSTANT SKIP
DELETEDELETE
12345678 0 -
-
;
#
/
=
/
9
qwe r t y u i p [ ]o
asdfghjk : BkSpl
zxcvbnm, / Delete
Space Space Space
Clear All
.
,
.
Indicates the limit of
Characters displayable
on CONTENT MENU.
Indicates the end of the
first line on CONTENT
MENU.
The character being
selected appears.
Operation guide
e.g.
Cursor
An entered character
will appear here.
Language
12 3
456
789
CLEARCLEAR
DELETEDELETE
-
;
#
/,
.
INSTANT SKIPINSTANT SKIP
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM36
37
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Entering characters
The cursor may be followed by unwanted characters.
You can erase them if necessary by either of the
following measures:
Erasing characters
Erasing all the characters on the writing board
Select Clear All by pressing / / / buttons, then
press ENTER button.
Alternatively, press CLEAR button.
Erasing one character before the cursor
Select BkSp by pressing / / / buttons, then
press ENTER button.
Alternatively, press DELETE button.
(1) Press button to select an input mode.
(2) Press / / / buttons to select a character, then
press ENTER button.
The selected character is input on the cursor.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) to enter characters.
(4) When finished, press button to save the
characters.
The characters you entered appears.
Notes
You can enter up to 64 characters.
When unnecessary information appears, or when you want
to alter the input character, press CLEAR button to erase
all, or press DELETE button to erase an unnecessary
character.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM37
38
Selecting a disc according to purposes of use (DVD-RAM/R/RW)
There are various types of discs having different standards.
Select one for your purpose of use.
Purposes of use
Editing after recording (e.g. deleting unnecessary
portions, dividing chapters).
Recording so that the sound of bilingual broadcast
can be switched.
Recording a Recording-once-permitted program.
Pause TV. ChaseTV.
Available disc
Internal HDD (hard disc drive)
DVD-RAM disc (Ver. 2.0/2.1/2.2)
You can repeatedly record/delete the contents.
Playing discs recorded on this recorder with other
DVD players.
(Some DVD players may not play these discs.)
Available disc
DVD-R disc (Ver. 2.0/2.1)
Once you record on a DVD-R disc, you cannot
delete or rewrite the contents in DVD-Video mode
(Video mode).
DVD-RW disc (Ver. 1.1/1.2)
Finalizing a DVD-R/RW disc
You can see the contents recorded on a
DVD-R/RW disc with other DVD players by
finalizing.
For details, see page 122.
When recording on a DVD-R/RW disc you need to set
up the recorder due to the restriction by the DVD-
Video standard.
For details, see the next page.
Before recording (Continued)
Recording
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM38
39
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Setting for recording on a DVD-R/RW disc in Video mode
This setting is necessary to play the contents on a DVD-R/RW disc with other DVD players.
Items to set up
When recording in Video mode, there are some
restrictions by DVD-Video standard.
Therefore, it is necessary to set up these items below.
Set up the items in advance before copying contents
from the HDD to a DVD-R/RW disc.
DVD compatible mode
Only the main sound and SAP sound are available
for recording in Video mode under DVD-R/RW
standard.
Off: This is not for recording on a DVD-R/RW
disc. Depending on Picture/Audio settings,
making DVD Video may not be possible.
(When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW
disc in DVD-Video mode, the recording
proceeds with Main on even though Off is
set.)
Main: In multichannel broadcasting, only the main
sound is recorded.
SAP: In multichannel broadcasting, only SAP
sound is recorded.
Aspect ratio
4:3 and 16:9 cannot be mixed in one title.
Therefore, set the aspect ratio before recording.
4:3: Set the aspect ratio to 4:3
16:9: Set the aspect ratio to 16:9
Chapter dividing (DVD-Video:CHP Create)
This is the setting to divide a title into some
chapters. It is convenient to skip scenes.
Off: Chapter dividing is not available.
5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min:
Select an interval for chapter dividing.
Note
When the number of chapters reaches a limit, chapters are
not divided anymore. The limit number of chapters is
dependent on conditions of a DVD-R/RW disc.
1Press SETUP.
SETUP menu appears.
2Select DVD recorder operation
and press ENTER.
3Select Aspect ratio (Video
mode) and press ENTER.
4Press / to select an item and
press ENTER.
Set up DVD compatible mode and DVD-Video:
CHP create as step 3, 4.
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
How to set up
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
SETUP
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD compatible mode
Picture record mode
4:3
Input Black level
Standard
Off
Off
Off
User record quality
DVD recorder operation
Rec DNR
On
3D Y/C separation
On
Relay recording
DVD-Video:CHP create
SETUP
3D Y/C separation
Relay recording
DVD compatible mode
Picture record mode
Input Black level
User record quality
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Standard
DVD recorder operation
Rec DNR
DVD-Video:CHP create
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
4:3
SETUP
3D Y/C separation
Relay recording
DVD compatible mode
Picture record mode
Input Black level
User record quality
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Standard
DVD recorder operation
Rec DNR
DVD-Video:CHP create
Aspect ratio(Video mode) 4:3
4:3
16:9
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM39
40
Recording
Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen
®
To record TV programs and end them automatically, follow the procedures of this chapter.
When using a satellite box, only manual timer recordings are available for setting recordings.
See page 43.
Before setting recording, see Before recording ( page 32).
1Press TV Guide.
TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS appears.
2Press / to select a TV program to record.
For searching a TV program, see page 24.
3Press REC repeatedly to select the recording
frequency.
Each time you press REC button, the icon changes.
For the icons, see page 42.
Preparation
When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the program.
Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
Make sure that the disc has enough space to record.
Set DVD Compatible mode beforehand. ( page 39)
To record satellite TV programs, set a recording manually ( page 43)
If you do not need to change recording options (recording mode or time range), see With recording frequency
selection only below.
If you want to change these recording options, follow the procedure of Changing the recording options procedure
( page 41) or Set recording by specifying details manually ( page 43).
With recording frequency selection only
Note
Recording will be executed on the defaut settings ( page 28).
Start
REC
ENTER
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
TV Guide
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM40
41
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Changing the recording options
1Press TV Guide, then press / to select a TV
program to record.
Or to search for a TV program, see page 24.
2Press Menu.
Episode Options appears.
3Press / to select set recording then
press ENTER.
Record Options appears.
e.g.
4Press / to shift and press / to select.
frequency:
See the next page.
start:
Choices are between 120 minutes early and 120
minutes late, to On time. (Default = On time)
end:
Choices are between 120 minutes early and 120
minutes late, to On time. (Default = On time)
(Continued)
Start
Record Options
cancel
schedule recording
once
frequency
On time
start
end
HDD
recorder
XP-Audio
quality
On time
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Menu
TV Guide
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM41
42
Note
If you cancel the selections, select cancel then press ENTER button.
recorder:
HDD: Records onto the HDD.
DVD: Records onto a loaded disc.
quality:
See Recording mode
5When complete, press / to select
schedule recording then ENTER.
Record Options is closed.
The icon appears on the TV program.
Frequency of recordings/reminders and icon Recording quality (recording mode)
The recording times listed above are for reference
purposes only and are not guaranteed. Recording
times may vary.
Icon
Recording
One time execution
Meaning
Keeps infomation without
executing, until the frequency is
changed.
For a program on the same
channel and at the same start
time
For a program on the same
channel and at the same start
time of Monday through Friday
*For new manual recording and new manual reminder
only.
For a program on the same channel
and at the same start time on the
selected day of the week.
Reminder
Once
Regularly
Daily*
Weekly
Off
ENTER
Mode Bit rate Sound
quality
Recording
time*
XP-Audio
XP
EXP-Audio
EXP
SP-Audio
SP
MP
LP
EP
SEP
User
8.0
9.2
4.8
6.2
3.2
4.6
3.0
2.2
1.4
1.0
L-PCM
D/M2
L-PCM
D/M1
L-PCM
D/M1
D/M1
D/M1
D/M1
D/M1
1
1
1.5
1.5
2
2
3
4
6
8
*4.7GB DVD-RAM disc
See page 183.
Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen
®
(Continued)
Recording
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM42
43
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Notes
The disc tray does not close automatically, even when the recording start time arrives. Set the recorder loaded an available
DVD-RAM/R/RW disc beforehand.
It it not possible to record the same contents onto both the HDD and a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc simultaneously.
When there is little time before a programmed recording starts, you may not be able to start another recording.
Playback of the DVD drive pauses when a programmed recording onto the HDD starts.
Do not change TV Guide On Screen settings (e.g., cable input, brand, etc.) while a recording is programmed. After then,
make the programing again if necessary.
Confirm the DVD compatible mode ( page 184) setting. Main or SAP records main sound or sub-sound of multiplex
broadcasts respectively, and does not record the other. Therefore, select Main or SAP only when you record onto a DVD-
R/RW disc.
When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set DVD compatible mode ( page 184) to the desired recording sound for each
timer program.
When recordings conflict, RECORDINGS CONFLICT! appears. Read the message, and choose an option by pressing /
then press ENTER button.
Setting recording (For satellite box
users)
1) Press TV Guide.
2) Press / to select SCHEDULE.
3) Press Menu.
Schedule Options appears.
4) Press / to select new
manual recording then
press ENTER.
Record Options appears.
5) Set the details.
* Available only when IR control is set to On.
6) When finishing the setting, press ENTER to
select schedule recording.
7) Press ENTER again to close Record Options.
Setting recording by specifying
by details manually
1) Press TV Guide.
2) Press / to select SCHEDULE.
3) Press Menu.
Schedule Options appears.
4) Press / to select new
manual recording then
press ENTER.
Record Options appears.
5) Set the details.
6) When finishing the setting, press ENTER to
select schedule recording.
7) Press ENTER again to close Record Options.
to change the parameter.
to input digits.
Enter the date
(Month/Day/Year).
Set the start time.
Set the end time.
Select a channel.
Select a recording source.
Select a recording media.
Select a picture quality.
Tuner: TV broadcasts
Line 1, 2, 3: Satellite TV,
etc.
Select how often
programmed recording is
executed.
/
/ to shift.
e.g.
123
456
789
0
to change the parameter.
to input digits.
Enter the date
(Month/Day/Year).
Set the start time.
Set the end time.
Select a channel*.
(For Line 3 input only.
Be sure to set input
to Line 3.)
Select Line 3.
Select a recording media.
Select a picture quality.
Select how often
programmed recording is
executed.
/
/
e.g.
123
456
789
0
to shift.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM43
44
Deleting a recording
2 ways are available.
On LISTINGS
1) Press TV Guide.
2) Select a TV program you have set to record
(icon displayed).
3) Press Menu.
Episode Options appears.
4) Press / to select delete recording, then
press ENTER.
5) Read the message, and press / to select
yes (if you want to delete), then press ENTER
to exit.
On SCHEDULE
1) Press TV Guide.
2) Press / to select SCHEDULE.
3) Press / to select a TV program you have set
to record.
4) Press Menu.
Episode Options appears.
5) Press / to select delete recording, then
press ENTER.
6) Read the message, and press / to select
yes (if you want to delete), then press ENTER
to exit.
Correcting a recording
1) Press TV Guide.
2) Press / to select SCHEDULE.
3) Press / to select a TV program you have set
to record.
4) Press Menu.
Episode Options appears.
5) Press / to select edit recording, then
press ENTER.
Record Options appears.
6) Change the selections.
7) Press / to select schedule recording, then
press ENTER.
To stop a scheduled recording
1) Press TV Guide.
2) Press / / / to select the TV program
currently being recorded.
3) Press REC repeatedly until the recording icon
disappears.
Turning the power off automatically after
completing a scheduled recording
1) While executing a scheduled recording, press
QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Auto power off then
press ENTER.
Keeping the power on even after the scheduled
recording finished
If the recorder turns itself on to execute a scheduled
recording, it will turn itself off after finishing the
recording. You can restrict this and keep the recorder
powered on.
1) While executing a scheduled recording, press
QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Continuous power on
then press ENTER.
Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen
®
(Continued)
Recording
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM44
45
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Recording a TV program
To record a TV program currently being broadcast, follow the procedures of this chapter.
Recording
1Press HDD or DVD to select a media to record
on.
HDD : To record on the HDD.
DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
2Select a channel to record.
Use any of the followings:
CH/Page buttons ( / )
Number buttons
TV Guide On Screen ( page 23)
3Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
recording mode.
Each time you press the button, the recording mode
indicator (SP/LP/MN) on the front panel changes.
Recording mode
The REC MODE button sets the following recording
modes; 2 modes (SP, LP) with fixed picture and sound
quality, and 1 (MN) for your customizing.
e.g. When a single sided 4.7GB DVD-RAM is used:
(Continued)
Preparation
When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
- Load a disc which has sufficient space available to record the program.
- Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
If you record on a DVD-R/RW disc, set DVD compatible mode ( page 184) to Main or SAP. In DVD-R/RW
recording, Off setting is regarded as Main.
If you record on a DVD-R/RW disc, set Aspect Ratio(Video mode) ( page 184) according to recording sources.
DVD
HDD
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
123
456
789
0
CH/Page
REC MODE
Start
Recording
mode Recording time Picture quality
SP
LP
MN
Approx. 2 hours
Approx. 4 hours
Standard quality
Inferior to SP
Variable according to your setting.
See page 46, 183.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM45
46
SETUP
HDD DVD
Custom setting
Setting
Total recording time: approx. 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
Manual
6.6
Mode
Rate
Audio quality
Manual1
2
3
4
5
Setting 1
L-PCM
D/M1
SP
LP
Manual
Manual
6.6
4.6
2.2
6.0
3.2
SP
4.6
D/M1
L-PCM
D/M1
D/M2
D/M1
User record quality
Recording a TV program (Continued)
Recording
You can set in advance the desired mode for each
recording media (HDD, DVD). See below.
Also for your customization of the MN mode, see below.
4Press REC.
Recording starts.
Customizing the MN mode
1) During stop or at step 3 on page 45, press
QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select User record quality then
press ENTER.
3) Change the setting for each recording media.
4) Press ENTER.
The menu disappears.
Press / to select HDD or DVD.
Press ADJUST to select the setting
number (1 - 5).
You can customize each setting.
Press / / / to select Mode, Rate
or ‘“Audio quality, then press ADJUST to
change the value.
Notes
To record a high quality picture, select MN to raise a bit
rate. The higher the bit rate, the better the picture quality is,
but the shorter the recording length becomes. We
recommend that you set this between 6.0 Mbps and 6.8
Mbps.
You can change the combination of picture and audio
quality settings also by displaying the Quick Menu on
LIBRARY MENU or in stop mode, then selecting User
Record Quality. Either of the above methods updates the
setting of this recorder.
If you set SP or LP, you cannot select L-PCM.
Depending on the audio quality settings, the upper limit for
the picture quality setting differs.
You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by
0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.4
to 2.0.)
e.g.
REC
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM46
47
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
To stop recording
Press STOP.
To pause recording (to omit an unnecessary
portion)
During recording, press PAUSE.
To resume recording, press it again.
Note
Pausing recording automatically creates a new chapter
division at that point.
To change a TV channel to be recorded
1) During recording, press PAUSE.
Recording pauses.
2) Press CH/Page or the number buttons to
change the channel.
3) Press PAUSE to resume recording.
Notes
During recording, you cannot change the recording parameters, such as modes, channels, etc.
The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc or 396 for the HDD.
One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 9 hours. Recording automatically stops at 9 hours.
Even during normal recording, you can set the programmed recording.
You cannot start recording immediately before a programmed recording starts.
For recorded sound, see page 73.
During monaural sound recording, the same sound is recorded on both the left and right channels.
When Audio is set to L-PCM, multi-channel sound is recorded as stereo sound. When playing this recorded sound, you
will hear MAIN and SAP sounds simultaneously. Press AUDIO button to select a desired sound.
When DVD compatible mode is set to Main or SAP, the unit records the same sounds on both the left and right channels
when receiving monaural sound. When receiving the multi-channel sound, the selected sound, Main or SAP, is recorded on
both the left and right channels
.
Depending on the disc contents, pressing REC button may take a longer time to start recording.
When a starting time of a programmed recording comes, a recording in execution is stopped and the programmed recording
starts. If you do not want to stop the recording, cancel the timer program before it starts
.
Even if you set Aspect ratio(Video mode) ( page 184) to 16:9, images are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio when using a
DVD-R/RW disc with Rate set to 1.0 (Mbps) or 1.4 (Mbps).
To view a TV program while recording another
1) Start recording on this recorder.
2) On a connected TV, select the TV mode.
3) Using the channel selector of the TV, select a
desired channel on the TV.
To reduce noise on recordings (Rec DNR)
Before recording, set Rec DNR ( page 185).
To record and play at the same time
To start recording while playing a disc
Stop playback, then select the other disc by
pressing HDD or DVD button, and start recording
on that disc.
To play a disc while recording on another disc
Select the disc that is not being recorded by
pressing HDD or DVD button, and start playback on
the disc.
Note
During a dubbing job, the unoccupied drive is available for
recording or playback, however, cannot perform a function
which records and plays simultaneously.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM47
48
To play a recorded title while recording another
on the same disc (Recorded Title Play)
HDD
DVD-RAM
During recording, you can play a title recorded on the
same disc.
1) While recording, press CONTENT MENU.
2) Press / / / to select a desired title, then
press ENTER.
Playback of the selected title starts.
Pressing STOP button stops playback, and the
content currently being recorded returns. If you
press PLAY button, playback resumes from the
location you last stopped.
Notes
The playback picture may appear after a delay of several
seconds.
While you are using this function, the following operations/
functions are not available.
- Programmed playback (repeat playback, intro scan etc.)
- Editing (Playlist programming, dubbing, title/chapter
naming, title thumbnail setting, etc.)
This function is not available during the 10 minutes
overlapped portion of the relay recording ( page 56).
Depending on the data condition, playback may pause.
During a dubbing job, this function is not available.
When recording contents which will be copied
to a DVD-R/RW disc later on
Before recording, set DVD compatible mode (
page 184) to On.
Each timer program must to be set its DVD
compatible mode from Quick Menu.
Creating chapters while recording
Press CHP DIVIDE button.
The content is divided into two chapters at the point
you pressed the button.
Note
If you want to divide into chapters at desired points on
DVD-R/RW discs, use this method. On those discs, you
cannot create chapters after recording.
Creating chapters automatically at regular
intervals
Set DVD-Video:CHP Create ( page 185).
Recording a TV program (Continued)
Recording
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 06.3.20, 4:16 PM48
49
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Recording
Recording an external source
You can record programs from connected equipment on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
Preparation
When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the program.
Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
Notes
If a source of high quality sound track such as DVD audio is recorded with this recorder, the sound quality becomes regular
audio CD quality. Refer to the instructions of the connected equipment.
When you record an external source onto a DVD-R/RW disc or the contents which will be copied to a DVD-R/RW disc later
on, set the connected equipment to output sound you want to record (if selectable such as multiplex broadcasting), as the
recorder records sounds of an external source in stereo onto a DVD-R/RW disc, ignoring the setting of DVD compatible
mode ( page 184).
DVD-R/RW discs cannot record contents with copy restriction signal embedded (copy-protected or copy once contents),
DVD-RAM discs can record copy once contents.
Some satellite programs via a connected tuner may contain both 4:3 pictures and 16:9 pictures. DVD-R/RW discs cannot
record such contents under the restriction of the DVD-Video standard. To record these programs, use the HDD or DVD-RAM
discs.
Depending on the source recording device used and how that device is set up, the video and sound quality of the recording
may vary slightly from the video and sound quality of the source device.
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Connect according to A or B.
A: Using the input jacks on the rear of the recorder
INPUT 2 (L-2)
For recording from a digital video
camera recorder, etc. connected to the
DV input terminal on the front panel,
see page 52, DV recording.
Yellow White Red
To record a clearer picture,
use the S video jack.
To video
output
jack
To audio
output jacks
Rear of the
recorder
INPUT1 (L-1)
YellowWhite
Video cable
Audio cable
To video
output jack
To audio
output jack
INPUT3 (L-3)
External equipment
B: Using the input jacks on the front of the recorder
Red
Video cable
Audio cable
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM49
50
Recording
Recording an external source (Continued)
1Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly so that L-1,
L-2, or L-3 appears on the front panel
display, corresponding to the input in which
the device is connected.
Each time you press the button, the indicator changes.
L-1: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT1 jacks on the rear panel.
L-2: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT2 jacks on the front panel.
L-3: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT3 jacks on the rear panel.
L-U: To record pictures currently played ( page 110).
Select L-3 to record pictures from a connected satellite
box using the DSS set top box control function.
2Press HDD or DVD to select a recording
media.
HDD : To record on the HDD.
DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
3Press REC of this recorder to start recording.
4Start playback of the source content on the
connected equipment.
5When recording is completed, press STOP.
Start
INPUT SELECT
DVD
HDD
REC
STOP
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM50
51
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Notes on recording from a connected VCR or camcorder
Check the condition of the source equipment before playing.
Set the equipment in a good condition, e.g. clean the head or adjust the tracking, etc. to obtain optimum playback.
Bad conditions may produce noises in playback. These noises may be detected as copy protection signals,
resulting in a stoppage of the recording.
Play a source in an usual mode. Avoid using any correcting or enhancing features, as they may add signals which
can be detected as copy protection signals.
Source quality or tape condition beyond adjustments on the source equipment may stop a recording on this
recorder.
Do not operate the source equipment during recording on this recorder.
Operations such as pausing, resuming, fast-forwarding (CUE) and fast-reversing (REVIEW), etc. may produce
noises, which may be detected as copy protection signals. Therefore, first start playback on the source equipment
to confirm that the desired source can be played properly, and then start recording on this recorder.
Do not operate the source equipment during recording. After completing the desired scene, stop the recording on
the recorder, and then stop the playback on the source equipment. Delete unnecessary scenes using editing
functions ( page 55). If you want to operate the source equipment during recording, pause or stop the
recording. After operating the source equipment, resume the recording as above.
When recording from a camcorder
Follow the above notes. Be sure to power the camcorder with its AC adapter, not batteries. If batteries are run
down, the recording may not be finished completely.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM51
52
DV recording (Recording from a digital video camera)
You can connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV IN terminal to record from it.
Preparation
Press HDD or DVD button to select a recording media
Connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV IN terminal on the front panel.
1Press EDIT MENU.
EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
2Press / to select DV Recording.
3Press ENTER.
EDIT MENU DV Recording (Option Setting) appears.
This display will also appear when a DV format digital
video camera connected to the DV IN terminal is turned
on
.
Recording
DV IN terminal
Start
EDIT MENU
ENTER
ENTER
AAA
BB
DV Recording (Option Setting)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Next
Change
DV Chapter Create Off By Date By Scene
DV Audio Input
User record quality
Stereo1(L2+R2) Stereo2(L2+R2)
DVD-Video:CHP Create
Off
5min. 10min. 15min. 20min.
4.6
D/M1
SP
Main Menu
Source
Edit Functions
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
Del Selected Items
DVD-Video Finalizing
Playlist Editing
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
HDD
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
DV Recording
When using DV terminal, it is used for
setting up Auto Chapter Creation and
User record quality.
Recording
DV Original Picture
Saved Title
3 4 521
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM52
53
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4Press / / / to make the settings.
As you select each item, an explanation is provided.
To change the picture and sound rates:
1) Press / buttons to select Change then press
ENTER button.
2) On the User record quality display, press ADJUST
button to select a setting number.
3) Press ENTER button.
5Press / / / to select Next, then press
ENTER.
Details of the recording appears.
6Play a connected DV format digital video
camera and pause the playback at a desired
scene.
7Press / / / to select Rec, then press
ENTER.
Recording starts.
To pause the recording, select Pause by
/ / / buttons then press ENTER button.
To stop the recording, select Stop (Save) by
/ / / buttons then press ENTER button.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
AAA
BB
DV Recording
ReturnEnd
Full Display
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Recording Media : DVD
––:––:––:––F
––:––:––
Playback Time
Recording Time
––:––:––
Remaining Space
User record quality
DV Chapter Create
Rec
-------------------
Play and then Pause with the connected equipment to DV.
-------------------
Equipment with DV Terminal
Manufacturer
Equipement
Rec Stop(Save)
4.6
D/M1
SP
Off
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM53
54
DV Recording (Recording from a digital video camera) (Continued)
Notes
The DV IN terminal of this recorder supports only input
from a DV format digital video camera. It cannot output to a
connected device. Some models of DV format digital video
cameras may be not compatible.
At step 5, you can enlarge the video image by selecting
Full Display, then pressing ENTER button.
If DV Chapter Create is set to Off and you record onto a
DVD-R/RW disc, chapters are automatically made
according to DVD-Video:CHP create setting
( page 185). The number of chapters has the limit.
Chapters are divided with a margin of about 0.5 second or
less according to the DVD-Video standard.
DV recording does not start in the following cases:
- While recording or in the time slip mode.
- While operating TV Guide On Screen, CONTENT MENU or
LIBRARY MENU.
- If the recorders clock is not set yet.
- Within 2 minutes before programmed recording starts, or
during programmed recording.
If DV recording overlaps with programmed recording, the
DV recording will stop 2 minutes before the programmed
recording starts, and the programmed recording will be
executed.
DV recording does not work if the DV IN terminal is
connected to equipment other than DV format digital video
camera, such as a PC.
Depending on the connected DV format digital video
camera, the display at step 5 may not show Manufacturer
or Equipment.
If the DV IN terminal is connected to more than one DV
format digital video camera, DV recording may not work
properly. For proper functioning of DV recording, connect
only one device to the DV IN terminal.
DV recording is not compatible with Relay recording.
Do not keep the DV IN terminal connected unless you
record from a DV format digital video camera, as it may
give influence on the recorder if operated.
If you leave EDIT MENU DV Recording unoperated for
about 15 minutes, it switches to the full mode if Screen
protector ( page 181) is set to On.
When you want to record both stereo 1 and stereo 2
sounds from a DV format digital video camera, additionally
make a connection to the audio input jacks on this recorder
using cables such as audio/video cables supplied with the
DV format digital video camera. ( page 52)
If a DV format digital video camera is not recognized, pull
out the plug and connect it again.
Some models of DV format digital video cameras may
support a different compression format. From such
equipment, recording is not possible.
Depending on the models of DV format digital video
cameras, recording may not work properly or some
functions may be disabled.
On an input source from a DV tape which is partly recorded
over, chapters may not be made properly.
Recording
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM54
55
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
1Press CONTENT MENU, then press / / /
to select a title to delete.
To display chapters, press button.
e.g.
2Press DELETE.
Alternate method:
Press QUICK MENU button, then press / buttons to
select Title delete (Chapter delete) and press ENTER
button.
3Read the message and press / to select
Yes, then press ENTER.
Start
Recording
Deleting recorded contents
Important note
Any deleted title/chapter (original) cannot be restored. Before deleting, be sure to check contents on the disc.
On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not possible.
To delete a title (chapter)
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Deleting multiple specified parts
Notes
Deleting a title (a chapter) decreases the numbers of the succeeding titles (chapters).
A chapter for under 5 seconds or shorter may not be deleted. Deleting a short chapter may not change the display of the
available disc volume.
Deleting a playlist title/chapter does not affect the original title/chapter.
Deleting an original title/chapter affects all the corresponding playlist title/chapters.
Deleting all chapters in a title erases the title itself.
Titles and chapters which contain still pictures cannot be deleted.
On a DVD-R/RW disc, deleting is not possible if the disc is finalized ( page 122).
Chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc cannot be deleted.
On a DVD-RW disc, only the last title recorded can restore the disc capacity by being deleted.
On a DVD-R disc, deleting cannot restore the disc capacity
.
1) Press HDD or DVD to select a disc that contains
titles or chapters you want to delete.
2) Press EDIT MENU.
3) Press / to select Del selected items, then
press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Del Selected items appears.
4) Select a part (a title or chapter) to delete.
(To select a part, see page 93 94.)
5) Press repeatedly to select Start, then press
ENTER.
The recorder begins the deletion process.
To cancel deleting, press / buttons to select No,
then press ENTER button.
Select a title to
delete pressing
/
/ /
.
HDD
Original
2006/03/24 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2006/03/29 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
2006/04/07 11:00
am TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM55
56
Recording
Others
To protect recorded content
You can protect recorded contents of the HDD or a
DVD-RAM disc from unexpected deletion.
Protection is provided for each title (original).
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in Playing recorded
contents (CONTENT MENU) ( page 60) to
select a title.
2) Press QUICK MENU button, and press /
buttons to select Title information. Then press
ENTER button.
3) Press QUICK MENU button, and press /
buttons to select Lock and then press ENTER
button.
The mark appears.
Notes
To cancel protection, repeat this procedure.
Disc initialization erases all titles on a disc even if they are
protected.
Executing All HDD titles delete( page 186) erases all
titles on the HDD even if they are protected.
Relay recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
This function automatically diverts a recording to the
HDD if a DVD-RAM disc is near capacity.
When the remaining time of the DVD-RAM disc has
reached about 10 minutes, the recorder starts
recording the same content on the HDD as well as
DVD-RAM. The chapter marks are automatically made
at the start and end points of the overlapped recording
portion. You can delete the unnecessary overlapped
portion afterwards by referring to the chapter marks.
To engage the Relay Recording function, set Relay
recording to On ( page 185).
Notes
When the capacity of the HDD is not sufficient, the
operation is canceled.
While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot pause
the recording.
While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot play a
recorded title on the same disc.
When another programmed recording is set just after the
relay recording, the relay recording stops about 2 minutes
before the next programmed recording starts.
Technical Information
About recording time
The recording time of a typical VCR (Video Cassette
Recorder) is determined by the length of a video tape
and recording speed (SP, LP, etc.). Video tapes with
various recording times are available on the market.
On the other hand, the recording time of a DVD-RAM/
R/RW depends on the bit rate (Mbps: amount of data
transmitted per second), which can be varied in
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group2)
compression technology.
As an example, when you pour water into a bucket
from a faucet, the faster the water flows, the sooner
the bucket is filled with water. On the other hand, the
slower the water flows, the more slowly the bucket is
filled. A DVD-RAM/R/RW is, so to speak, like a bucket,
and the degree you turn the faucet is bit rate, the time
required to fill the bucket with water is the recording
time available for a disc. The higher you set the bit rate
(making much more water flow), the sooner a disc is
filled. Consequently, the recording time becomes
shorter. The lower you set the bit rate, the longer time
it takes to fill a disc.
About picture quality (SP, LP, MN (Manual) mode)
The higher you set the bite rate, the more the volume
of information for the picture. The lower the bit rate, the
less the volume of picture information.
However a high bit rate does not always mean that the
picture quality is high. The difference between the 1.4
Mbps and 9.2 Mbps is obvious, but when comparing
similar bit rates, the difference may be insignificant.
Generally when you set the bit rate low for a longer
recording, the data volume shortage will result in a
lack of detail information. As a result, the picture
quality is decreased (more noticeable with dynamically
moving images). For example, square noises (block
noise) may occur in a scene with fast action or a
scene with light and shadows, such as a water
surface.
This recorder has two settings, 2 hour recording at
SP mode or 4 hour recording at LP mode (both
assume a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM). It is
recommended to consider the SP mode as a
standard mode and use the LP mode when you want
to record for long time regardless of the picture quality.
When you want to record a music program or
animation with high picture quality, it is recommended
that you select the MN mode. If you select more than
6 Mbps, you can usually record with considerably
higher picture quality. However the higher you set the
bit rate, the shorter the recording time.
Recording start
Recording end
10min.
DVD-RAM disc
HDD
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM56
57
Recording
Introduction Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
D /M1, D /M2
Sound recording format onto DVD-RAM discs. When
recording, sounds are converted into digital signals
and compressed. In playback, they are extracted to the
original sound. The standard differenciates D /M1
and D /M2 in data volume to use. D /M1 and
D /M2 are applied the digital recording technology
for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories. Dolby
Digital 192 kbps is set for D /M1 and Dolby Digital
384 kbps for D /M2.
L-PCM (Linear PCM)
Sound recording format, like Dolby Digital. However,
sounds are converted into digital signals and recorded
as they are without compression. This process
requires more data than Dolby Digital.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM57
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 06.3.20, 4:16 PM58
Playback
Play your favorite contents.
Playing recorded contents
(CONTENT MENU)
Playing a DVD video disc
Other playback functions
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM59
60
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU)
Titles and chapters recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc are displayed in thumbnail view, so
that you can easily locate a desired one.
You can play recorded TV programs also from TV Guide On Screen. See page 25.
1Press CONTENT MENU.
CONTENT MENU Title List appears.
You can switch between HDD and DVD drives by
presing HDD or DVD button.
2Press / / / to select a title (chapter).
You can view succeeding or prior pages by pressing
PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button.
To select a chapter, select a title and press button.
The Chapter List appears.
By pressing button again, you can return to Title List.
3Press ENTER.
Playback starts from a selected title (chapter).
Attribution
(original/playlist)
e.g.
Notes
On CONTENT MENU, titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist) in order from the oldest one respectively.
To turn off CONTENT MENU, press CONTENT MENU button. Absence of operations for longer than about 15 minutes also
turns off CONTENT MENU.
The mark is displayed in every thumbnail when HDD/RAM title play ( page 183) is set to Title resume. When set to
Serial playback, it is displayed in a thumbnail last operated.
You can change a thumbnail picture. See page 126.
You cannot display CONTENT MENU for DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices.
For playing a recorded title while recording another, see page 48.
A black thumbnail with Recording means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This
thumbnail cannot start playback.
Playback
CONTENT MENU
ENTER
ENTER
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
Original
2006/03/24 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2006/03/29 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2006/04/07 11:00
am TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM60
61
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
HDD
Original
2006/03/24 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2006/03/29 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2006/04/07 11:00
am TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
To stop playback
Press STOP.
To pause playback (still playback)
Press PAUSE.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY button or
PAUSE button.
Note
Sound is muted in still mode.
To skip by 1/20 of whole
During playback, press / .
Each time you press the button, you can skip by 1/20
of the current title or track if it is longer than 1 minute.
STOP
PAUSE
To skip the contents in pre-determined
increments
During playback, press INSTANT SKIP.
Each time you press the button, you can skip by a
specified time.
You can select the interval per press of the button. See
Instant skip interval( page 182).
To skip back in pre-determined increments
During playback, press INSTANT REPLAY.
Each time you press the button, you can go back by
the specified time to resume playback.
You can select the interval per press of the button. See
Instant replay interval ( page 183).
Notes
This operation may not work for some discs.
Depending on the structure of a disc, some operations may
be limited.
Depending on playback conditions, some operations may
not work.
Erasing content
1) On CONTENT MENU, select an unnecessary
title (chapter).
2) Press QUICK MENU.
A Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / / / to select Title delete.
4) Press ENTER.
The confirmation message appears.
5) Press / to select Ye s or No then press
ENTER again.
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
Each recorded content is displayed as its thumbnail.
A recorded title is marked with
Original. A fictitious title created by
editing is marked with Playlist.
This shows that the recorder memorizes the location
you last stopped playback in each title.
To use this function, set HDD/RAM title play to Title
resume. ( page 183)
You can make the recorder memorize only the very
last point, regardless of the number of titles.
Set HDD/RAM title play to Serial playback. (
page 183)
Titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist) in order from
the oldest one.
Reading CONTENT MENU
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM61
62
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)
Playback
Playing at various speeds
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward
During normal playback, press PICTURE SEARCH.
: Fast forward playback
: Fast reverse playback
Each time you press the button, the playback speed changes.
During fast forward playback at “ ” speed, sound is
reproduced. (Not available on VIDEO CD.)
This function is not available when you play a title
recorded on a DVD-RAM disc while recording another.
Notes
The playback speed may vary depending on the disc.
Depending on the disc or data condition, picture and sound in fast forward playback
at “ ” speed may be disturbed.
P
I
C
T
U
R
E
S
E
A
R
C
H
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Skipping to the next/previous chapter
or track
Press SKIP ( /) repeatedly until the
chapter or track number you want appears.
Playback starts from the selected
chapter or track.
:
Playback starts from the beginning
of the next chapter or track.
:
Playback starts from the beginning
of the current chapter or track.
When you press twice, playback
starts from the beginning of the
previous chapter or track.
Notes
Some titles may not display chapter numbers.
When playing the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, you can
access chapters only in the current title if HDD/RAM title
play ( page 183) is set to Title resume. To access
chapters in other titles, set to Serial playback.
When playing a DVD video disc or a DVD-R/RW disc, you
can locate chapters only in the current title if DVD title
stop ( page 178) is set to On. To access chapters in
other titles, set to Off. However, in this instance even
though you press SKIP button ( ) to go back to the
previous title, playback will not start from the last chapter
of the title but from the first chapter.
S
K
I
P
Viewing still pictures
(Playing a disc that contains still pictures)
1) Press PLAY.
The first still picture on a disc is
displayed.
Some DVD video discs may allow
you to change the pictures using
the PLAY, ENTER or SKIP button.
2) Press FRAME ( / ).
: Displays the next still
picture.
: Displays the previous still
picture.
PLAY
F
R
A
M
E
/
A
D
J
U
S
T
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM
Playing in slow-motion (Not available
in CD playback)
Press SLOW during playback.
: Forward slow-motion
: Reverse slow-motion
Each time you press the SLOW button,
the slow-motion speed changes.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
Notes
Slow-motion does not provide smooth playback.
When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse slow-motion
playback is not available.
The speed level displayed is approximate.
Playing frame by frame
1) During playback, press PAUSE.
A still picture is displayed.
2) Press FRAME ( / ).
: Playback direction
: Opposite direction
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY or PAUSE.
Notes
Sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
Frame by frame playback cannot provide smooth playback.
Picture may advance more than 1 frame at a time.
Depending on scenes, some frames may not be played.
When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse frame by frame
playback is not available.
S
L
O
W
PAUSE
F
R
A
M
E
/
A
D
J
U
S
T
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM62
63
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Resuming playback from the location last
stopped (Title resume)
The recorder memorizes the location you last stopped
playback to resume from there.
To use this function, set HDD/RAM title play (
page 183) to Title resume. The recorder will
memorize the location you last stopped at in each title,
so you can resume playback from there. For example,
if there are 6 titles, you can start each of them as if
you had stored 6 video tapes in the recorder.
To return to the beginning of the title
During playback, press QUICK MENU button, then
press / buttons to select Restart title, then
press ENTER button.
To play another title
Press CONTENT MENU button to display
CONTENT MENU Title List, then select a title.
You can make the recorder memorize only the very
last point, regardless of the number of titles. Set
HDD/RAM title play ( page 183) to Serial
playback.
To return to the beginning of the title
Press SKIP ( ) button repeatedly until the
beginning of the title appears.
To play the other title
Press SKIP ( / ) button repeatedly.
Notes
Depending on conditions or contents, playback may not
start from the location last stopped at, but instead another
location. For example, from the beginning of the disc or
title.
Depending on a disc, there may be a slight difference
between the location the recorder memorizes and the
actual location where playback starts.
This function is not available on DVD-R/RW discs.
The resuming function will not work if the write-protect tab
is set to PROTECT ( page 8).
Playing the digest (Skip Search)
This feature repeats playback of about 5 seconds and
skip of 1 minute from the beginning to the end of a
recorded title, so that you can view the digest of it.
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 on page 60, and
select a title that you want to view the digest.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu is displayed.
3) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
4) Press / to select Skip search, then press
ENTER.
The Skip Search starts.
Notes
This feature can be used for only one title (original)
recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
While using this feature, you cannot use speed-related
functions such as fast forward or fast reverse.
If you press ENTER button while using this feature, the
normal playback starts.
To cancel this feature, press STOP button twice.
Viewing the first scene of a title (Original)
(Intro scan)
1) After step 1 on page 60, press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
3) Press / to select Intro scan, then press
ENTER.
The recorder plays the first 5 seconds of each title
beginning from title 1.
You can go forward or back by pressing SKIP
buttons.
: to go to the next title.
: to go back to the current title.
Press twice to go back to the previous title.
4) When you find a desired title, press ENTER.
The selected title is played.
Notes
To stop Intro Scan, press STOP button twice.
This feature can be used for only titles (Original) recorded
on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
Playing all titles (original/playlist) in a disc
Set HDD/RAM title play ( page 183) to Serial
playback. You can play all titles in the HDD and DVD-
RAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on CONTENT
MENU, as if they were recorded in one video tape.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM63
64
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)
Playback
Checking the background information on a
selected title
1) At step 2 on page 60, select a title (chapter)
then press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Title information, then
press ENTER.
Detail information of a selected title (chapter)
appears. You can switch the chapters on the title by
pressing PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) buttons.
Notes
From Quick Menu on CONTENT MENU Title Information,
you can change the details such as names, genres or
dates which will help sorting and searching on Library
system ( page 132).
Also you can protect the title from unexpected erasure
( page 56).
To return to the previous menu, press button.
To cancel the procedure, press CONTENT MENU button.
Playing all titles (original) in a disc
(Play All ORG Titles)
You can play all Original titles in the HDD or a DVD-
RAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on CONTENT
MENU, as if they were recorded in one video tape.
1) Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
e.g.
3) Press / to select Play all ORG titles, then
press ENTER.
e.g.
Playback starts from the beginning of title 1.
Notes
To stop Play all ORG titles, press STOP button twice.
(However, do this when you are playing a title recorded in
the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc while recording ( page 48)
will stop the recording.)
Alternatively, press QUICK MENU button to display the
quick menu, and press / buttons to select Cancel play
all ORG titles and press ENTER button.
When the last title is complete, All ORG Title Play stops.
If you select Repeat all ORG titles at step 3), Play all
ORG titles repeats.
This function is available only for titles recorded on HDD or
DVD-RAM discs.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
SAP
Exit
User record quality
Intro scan
Skip search
Repeat all ORG titles
Play all ORG titles
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
SAP
Exit
User record quality
Intro scan
Skip search
Repeat all ORG titles
Play all ORG titles
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM64
65
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Changing the order of titles
You can change the order or sort the titles by genres.
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
CONTENT MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select Display changeover, then
press ENTER.
4) Press / to select the item, then press
ENTER.
Arrange
Titles are rearranged along with the selected
order.
Press / buttons to select the order, then
press ENTER button.
Sort by genre
Titles of the selected genre are sorted.
Press / buttons to select the genre, then
press ENTER button.
Sort by original
Titles (Original) are sorted.
Sort by playlist
Titles (Playlist) are sorted.
Note
To cancel, select Display changeover then Cancel
Arrange/Narrowing from Quick Menu.
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
Arrange
Sort by genre
Sort by original
Sort by playlist
Jumping to a specified page
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
CONTENT MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select Specific page jump, then
press ENTER.
4) Enter the page number you want by pressing
ADJUST, / or the number buttons.
To clear the number, press CLEAR button.
5) Press ENTER.
The specified page appears.
Notes
Some discs conditions or discs which contain copy once
contents may not permit proper playback.
•“Title resume ( page 183) is not available.
HDD
Original
2006/03/24 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2006/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2006/04/08 11:00
am TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
e.g.
Specific Page Jump
Page Number
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 06.3.20, 4:16 PM65
66
Playback
Playing a DVD video disc
You can also play VIDEO CDs, audio CDs or finalization processed DVD-R discs in the same manner.
To play recorded contents, follow the instructions on page 60.
Preparation
Turn on a TV or audio system and select the corresponding input source that the recorder is connected to.
Load a disc you want to play. ( page 20)
1Press DVD.
The DVD indicator on the front panel will illuminate.
This indicates that the recorder is ready to play a disc in
the disc tray (DVD mode).
2Press PLAY.
Playback starts.
Depending on a disc, playback starts automatically by
loading the disc.
The recorder may take a short time to start playback.
This occurs because the recorder is reading the data
of a disc.
PLAY
DVD
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Start
Note
DVD video discs provide high resolution pictures and a lot of information.
Because of this, you may notice some fine picture noises on TV screen,
which you have never seen with regular broadcast TV program. While the
amount of noise depends on the TV you use with the recorder, you should
generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD
video discs.
Notes
The instructions above describe basic procedures which may vary depending on the contents of a DVD video disc. If different
instructions appear on the TV screen, follow those instructions.
If you display the top menu during playback and press TOP MENU button again without selecting any title, the recorder may
resume playback from the point where you first pressed TOP MENU button. (depending on the actual DVD video disc.)
This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains a top menu.
Instruction notes of discs may refer to the button that displays the top menu as TITLE button.
Locating a title using the top menu
S
ome DVD video discs may include a top menu, on which you can view the structure of contents or select a
scene. Most of the top menus automatically appear in certain scenes, and also are displayed on demand.
Actual operation of the top menu depends on a disc. This section explains a general example of how to
operate a top menu. Also refer to the instructions of the disc itself.
1) Press TOP MENU.
2) Press / / / to select the title you want.
If the titles in the top menu are assigned a number, you can directly locate a specific title by pressing its
designated number with the number buttons.
3) Press ENTER.
DVD-RW
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-R
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 06.3.22, 3:32 PM66
67
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Resuming playback from the location last
stopped at (Resume Play)
You can resume playback from the location where you
stopped at.
If you press PLAY button after stopping playback, the
playback resumes from the location you have stopped.
If you stop playback by pressing STOP button twice,
the resume playback feature will be cancelled.
Notes
Resume feature cannot function when:
you select a disc menu language ( page 176) or change
the parental lock setting ( page 177).
you play a PBC-featured VIDEO CD.
you open the disc tray.
There may be a difference in the location where playback
resumes depending on the disc.
While the recorder retains a location in memory, initial setting
changes may function only after the memory is cleared.
Selecting the sound
If a disc contains several languages, you can select a
preferred language from them to hear.
1) During playback, press AUDIO.
Each time you press the button, output sound
changes.
Selecting Subtitles
You can display subtitles on the TV screen and select
a subtitle language from those included on the disc.
1) Press SUBTITLE during playback.
The current subtitle setting appears.
e.g.
2)
Press to select Status, then press ADJUST
to select On.
Skip to step 3 if On is already displayed.
3)
Press to select Subtitle, then press ADJUST to
select a language.
The subtitles of recorded languages appear.
To turn the subtitles on or off
At step 2, select Off by pressing ADJUST button.
Notes
Some DVD video discs are set to display subtitles
automatically.
Depending on the scene, subtitles may not appear
immediately after you set the subtitle function to on.
Some DVD video discs will allow you to change subtitle
languages and turn subtitles on or off only via the disc
menu.
Selecting the camera angle
If the scene was recorded with multiple angles, you
can easily change the camera angle of the scene you
are watching.
1)
Press ANGLE while playing a scene recorded with
multiple angles.
While playing a scene recorded with multiple
angles, the angle icon appears on the TV screen
and on the front panel. Press ANGLE button while
the angle icon is displayed.
e.g.
2) Press ADJUST while the angle number is
displayed on the TV screen.
You can also select the camera angle by pressing
ANGLE button several times.
The angle icon disappears after about 3 seconds
if no further selections are made.
To turn off the angle icon
Set On screen display in the setup menu to Off (
page 181).
Most of the on-screen display including the angle icon
will not appear.
While the angle icon is flashing on the front panel
display, you can change the camera angle.
Notes
You can also change the camera angle during still
playback. The camera angle changes to the new setting
when you resume normal playback.
If you pause a picture immediately after changing a camera
angle, the resumed playback picture may not display the
new camera angle.
Depending on a disc, the camera angle may not change
even though the angle number changes.
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
Setting number and language
The language code appears
instead of the language name.
Refer to the list of languages and
their abbreviations. ( page
195)
Subtitle
Status
1
Off
Angle
1
/
6
Angle icon
Total number of angles
Current selection
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 06.3.20, 4:16 PM67
68
Playback
Other playback functions
Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later (Pause TV)
This function enables you to pause a TV broadcast and resume viewing at a later, more convenient time,
by storing the TV broadcast temporarily on the HDD.
1
While viewing a TV broadcast via this recorder
or immediately before it starts, press TIMESLIP
.
When pause TV mode is ready, playback starts
automatically.
The recorder begins to store the broadcast on the HDD
the moment you press TIMESLIP button.
2Locate a scene you want by the following
methods.
Fast-forward/fast-reverse:
Press PICTURE SEARCH button.
Forward/reverse Slow-motion:
Press SLOW button.
Forward/reverse frame by frame play:
First press PAUSE button then press FRAME button.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY button.
You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the
current broadcast.
3Press TIMESLIP to exit this mode.
The recorder stops storing the broadcast on the HDD.
A message appears and asks you whether you will save
the stored data or erase it.
Press / buttons to select, then press ENTER button.
Notes
This function is not available during recording.
Pause TV recording stops when the HDD is filled up. It will not begin if the HDD has no remaining space.
While using this pause TV recording, you cannot program a recording.
Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.
TIMESLIP
TIMESLIP
Start
HDD
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 06.3.20, 4:16 PM68
69
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Playing a TV program currently being recorded (Chase Play)
You can begin playback from the beginning of a program currently being recorded.
You will find this function of great advantage on long programs, as you do not have to wait for the end of
recording to begin playback.
1While recording a TV program on the HDD or a
DVD-RAM disc, press TIMESLIP.
The recorder displays a TV program as it is being
recorded.
2Go back to the beginning of the TV program
using SKIP.
When you go back to the beginning, playback starts
automatically.
You can confirm how far you are from the current
broadcast by pressing TIME BAR button.
3Locate a scene you want through the
following operations if necessary.
Fast-forward/fast-reverse:
Press PICTURE SEARCH button.
Forward/reverse Slow-motion:
Press SLOW buttons.
Forward/reverse frame by frame play:
First press PAUSE button then press FRAME button.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY button.
You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the
current broadcast.
4Press TIMESLIP to exit.
The current broadcast returns.
Notes
Time slip recording/playback stops when the capacity of a disc is filled up. You can play a location where the recorder
stopped the recording. The time slip recording/playback cannot begin if the disc has no remaining space.
The playback picture may appear after a delay of several seconds.
The playback location will never follow up to the recorded location in the program. It will always trail the recorded location by a
few seconds.
While using time slip recording/playback, you cannot program recording.
While TIMESLIP indicator is on, you cannot change the setting of the feature, which turns off the recorder after a
programmed operation has finished.
Even while Auto power off is selected, the recorder does not turn off if the recording end time comes during playback of a
program being recorded.
This function is not available on a DVD-RAM disc when Relay recording ( page 185) is set to On.
Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.
TIMESLIP
S
K
I
P
TIMESLIP
Start
HDD
DVD-RAM
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 06.3.20, 4:16 PM69
70
Other playback functions (Continued)
Playback
Zooming a picture
You can magnify areas within a picture.
1) Press ZOOM.
A zoom scope appears.
2) Select a zoom point and magnification level.
:
Raises the magnification level.
:
Lowers the magnification level.
/ / / :
Moves the zoom point. (only after the image has been magnified)
CLEAR :
Returns the zoom point to the center of the picture.
Notes
Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
During some scenes, the buttons may not work as described.
The zoom feature is canceled when the disc menu is operated.
The magnification level varies depending on the picture size you select ( page 48,
in INSTALLATION GUIDE).
The zoom feature is not available while displaying on the screen menu.
The zoom feature is canceled when you stop playback or start playback.
To cancel the zoom
Press ZOOM.
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window (P in P playback)
During playback, you can watch a TV broadcast in the sub window. (P in P : Picture in Picture)
1) During playback, press P in P.
A sub window (program on the air or on the recording)
appears.
2) Press / / / to select the position of the sub
window.
You can shift the sub window in following 4 directions.
// / is the moving range.
To turn off the sub window, press P in P button.
Notes
You can change the channel of the sub window by pressing
CH / button.
The P in P function is available only during playback.
You cannot swap the playback picture with the picture
within the sub window, or change the audio settings.
Press P in P button during Chase Play or Pause TV, the
actual broadcast appears on the sub window in real time.
If this function is stopped after shifting the sub window,
before you press P in P button again, the sub window will
appear in the last position you set.
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Zoom scope
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 06.3.20, 4:16 PM70
71
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time (Time Search)
1) Press T.SEARCH.
You may have to press repeatedly, depending on a disc. Press the
button until the following display appears.
e.g.
2) Press the number buttons and / to enter the desired time location on
the disc.
e.g. To enter 1 hour, 25 minutes, and 30 seconds
3) Press ENTER.
Notes
Some discs may not respond to this process.
Some scenes may not be accessed precisely as you specified.
This method for accessing specific locations is available only within the current title of
the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW/DVD video disc or within a current track of a VIDEO
CD/audio CD.
Pressing CLEAR button resets the numbers.
001
00 00 00
::
Title
Search
Time
Locating by entering the number of a desired section
Normally titles, chapters, and tracks are numbered. By entering these
numbers, you can access a desired section.
1) Press T.SEARCH.
e.g.
2) Press / to select a section (title or chapter) you want to locate.
e.g.
3) Press the number buttons to enter a number of the section.
e.g. To enter 25, press 2, then press 5.
4) Press ENTER.
Notes
Pressing CLEAR button resets the numbers. To clear the display, press T.SEARCH
button several times (depending on a disc).
This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains title numbers.
If a title is erased, the numbers of the following titles decrease respectively.
When you record a new title (Original) on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, it is added
prior to current titles (Playlist), and each following title (Playlist) reference number will
advance by a factor of 1.
Title
Search
0001Chapter
001
0001
001
Title
Search
Chapter
If you are using a VIDEO
CD/audio CD, skip step 2.
When you want to
locate a chapter.
01“ ”25“ ”30
hour minute second
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 06.3.20, 4:16 PM71
72
Other playback functions (Continued)
Playback
Selecting the sound
You can select a preferred language and a sound format.
Sound
Output
1
PCM
2ch
English
1Press AUDIO during playback or while
receiving a broadcast.
The current audio setting appears.
The language code appears instead of the language
name. Refer to the list of languages and their
abbreviations. ( page 195)
2Press ADJUST while the audio setting is
displayed on the TV screen.
Variation of channels depends on the disc or the type of
TV broadcast.
HDD
DVD-RAM
, TV channel signals
Stereo sound
Stereo (left channel and right channel)
Stereo L (left channel)
Stereo R (right channel)
( Back to Stereo)
SAP sound
Main SAP Main + SAP ( Back to Main)
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-R
Language name / sound recording system / No. of
channels
e.g.
VCD
Stereo Stereo L Stereo R ( Back to Stereo)
The display turns off if you do not operate for more than
3 seconds.
If you press / buttons to select Output, you can
select the audio output setting ( page 180) by using
ADJUST buttons.
Sounds in playback
You can play SAP and/or stereo broadcasts with this recorder. Refer to steps 1 and 2 to select a desired audio.
MTS Broadcast Compatibility
This recorder can receive or record MTS (Multichannel TV sound) broadcast.
By connecting the recorder to your stereo system or stereo TV, you will try the SAP or stereo sound.
SAP (Second Audio Program broadcast)
A separate audio program, usually broadcast in a second language with the main language.
AUDIOAUDIO
F
R
A
M
E
/
A
D
J
U
S
T
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Start
Desired sound
SAP sound
Stereo sound
Sound output
SAP
Stereo Sound
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p072-073 06.3.20, 4:16 PM72
73
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Recorded sounds
According to your setting of SAP on the setup menu screen, ( page 181), the sound is recorded onto different
channels of the disc below. Set SAP to On or Off appropriately.
Setting on the setup screen Type of receiving broadcast Contents of recorded sound Type of record
DVD Compatible Mode SAP Lch Rch
Off Off Stereo + SAP L R Stereo
Mono + SAP Mono Mono Stereo
Stereo L R Stereo
Mono Mono Mono Stereo
On Stereo + SAP L + R SAP Dual Mono*
Mono + SAP Mono SAP Dual Mono*
Stereo L R Stereo
Mono Mono Mono Stereo
Main Off Stereo + SAP L R Stereo
Mono + SAP Mono Mono Stereo
Stereo L R Stereo
Mono Mono Mono Stereo
On Stereo + SAP L + R L + R Stereo
Mono + SAP Mono Mono Stereo
Stereo L R Stereo
Mono Mono Mono Stereo
SAP Off Stereo + SAP L R Stereo
Mono + SAP Mono Mono Stereo
Stereo L R Stereo
Mono Mono Mono Stereo
On Stereo + SAP SAP SAP Stereo
Mono + SAP SAP SAP Stereo
Stereo L R Stereo
Mono Mono Mono Stereo
* This will be Stereo when a recording is made with L-PCM selected.
Notes
Some discs allow you to change audio selections only via the disc menu. If this is the case, press MENU button and
choose the appropriate language from the selections on the disc menu.
When you turn on the recorder or replace a disc, the recorder returns to the initial default setting. ( page 176)
Depending on a disc, a specific type of audio the disc has is output.
Immediately after you have switched sounds, there may be a temporary discrepancy between the display and actual
sound.
The BITSTREAM/PCM jack may not output SAP sound you select. In this instance, set Audio out select to PCM.
( page 180)
You cannot change SAP sound if recorded with DVD compatible mode ( page 184) set to Main. Even when DVD
compatible mode ( page 184) is set to Off, the recorder regards it as Main when recording to a DVD-R/RW disc.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p072-073 06.3.20, 4:16 PM73
74
Other playback functions (Continued)
Playback
Viewing JPEG files
You can play JPEG files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on the recorder.
Preparations
Prepare a compatible disc ( page 75) that contains JPEG files you want to view.
Set Priority contents ( page 183) to Photo.
Make your TV shape conform to the 4:3 picture size. Only 4:3 pictures can be played regardless of the function
settings via the on-screen displays of the recorder ( page 48, INSTALLATION GUIDE). If the TV is adjusted
to other sizes, e.g. WIDE, images will appear to be horizontally expanded. For details, refer to the owners
manual of your TV.
1Press DVD.
2Load a CD that contains JPEG files.
Each photo appears for about 3 seconds (slide show).
If a slide show does not start, press PLAY button.
Depending on the disc, CONTENT MENU Picture List
appears. See On CONTENT MENU Picture List””
( page 75) to operate.
DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
To stop playback (slide show)
Press STOP.
If you press PLAY button after pressing STOP button,
playback will start from the photo you stopped at.
To pause playback (slide show)
Press PAUSE.
To resume, press PAUSE button again or press PLAY
button.
To skip photos
During playback, press SKIP button repeatedly.
: To skip forward.
: To skip backward.
To rotate a picture
Press ANGLE repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, the picture rotates by
90° degree.
Note
The rotated image is displayed after its original posture
appears momentarily.
To magnify a picture
Follow the procedure on page 70.
Notes
The magnified image is displayed after its original posture
appears momentarily.
For small pictures, the reduction level may be limited.
Notes
Some files may not display their own entire images depending on the size.
JPEG picture playback is not available during recording on the HDD.
Operation to JPEG file will be disabled at about 2 minutes before a programmed recording starts.
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 06.3.20, 4:16 PM74
75
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Viewing a specified photo (single view)
Full screen still view.
2 ways are available:
On CONTENT MENU Picture List
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
CONTENT MENU Picture List appears.
Depending on the disc, the recorder creates either
temporary folder, Auto or All.
Auto: For CD of which compatibility confirmed by
TOSHIBA. Only playable files are listed.
All: For CD other than above. All files are listed.
Some CDs may not comply with the above.
2) Press / / / to select a folder or photo.
Pressing PICTURE SEARCH ( /) button turns
the pages.
If you press button, the list changes to thumbnail
view (CONTENT MENU Pictures).
Pressing ANGLE button rotates the picture. The
rotation of pictures is kept until the CD is ejected.
To return to the previous list, press button again.
3) Press ENTER.
If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and
3) until your favorite file appears.
The selected photo appears in full screen.
Notes
•“CONTENT MENU Picture List cannot show all the files in
a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of regular play of
the disc.
The larger the file size is, the longer the thumbnail takes
time to appear.
Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
are not displayed.
JPEG files compatibility
Discs whose compatibility with this recorder has been
confirmed by TOSHIBA are as follows.
CANON QuickCD
FUJICOLOR CD
Kodak Picture CD
NORITSU QSS CD
JPEG disc compatibility with this recorder is limited as
follows:
Playable discs:
CD-ROM, CD-R
CD-RW is not recommendable.
CD physical format:
Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1
File system:
ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet
File name:
A file name should be in alphabet and
numerals only, and must incorporate JPG
extension.
e.g.********.JPG
Total number of folders:
Less than 256
Total number of files:
Less than 1000
Some files may not display their own entire image
depending on the size.
Some discs may not permit this operation. Especially,
the following conditions of included files will increase
the discs disability.
1. Pixels over 5000 x 5000 in height and/or width
2. File format except Exif
Direct input of a photo number
1) Press T.SEARCH.
An input window appears.
2) Input a photo number using the number buttons
or ADJUST.
3) Press ENTER.
The selected photo appears in full screen.
To change the playback order
1) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER.
To shift the cursor, press / buttons.
Reverse : To reverse the order.
Repeat : To repeat the current folder.
3) Press ENTER.
Playback in the selected mode starts.
001
Photo
Search
e.g.
Picture List Page CD
MENU
CONTENT
001
DH100001
004
DH100004
007
DH100003
010
DH100006
DH100009
016
DH100012
019
DH100015
022
DH100018
002
DH100002
Auto
005
DH100001
008
DH100004
011
DH100007
014
DH100010
017
DH100013
020
DH100016
023
DH100019
003
DH100001
006
DH100002
009
DH100005
012
DH100008
015
DH100011
018
DH100014
021
DH100017
024
DH100020
1/ 3
013
File number
If you select this icon and press the ENTER button,
upper folders appear.
e.g.
Picturs Page
CD
MENU
CONTENT
/ / JPEG
1/ 8
e.g.
Picture List Page
CD
MENU
CONTENT
001
DH100001
004
DH100004
007
DH100003
002
DH100002
All
005
DH100001
008
DH100004
003
DH100001
006
DH100002
009
DH100005
1/ 3
e.g.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 06.3.20, 4:16 PM75
76
Other playback functions (Continued)
Playback
Playing MP3/WMA files
You can play MP3/WMA files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on this recorder.
Preparations
Make sure that a disc you want to play is compatible with this recorder. See page 77.
Set Priority contents ( page 183) to Audio.
1Press DVD.
2Load a CD that contains MP3/WMA files.
Playback starts from the first track of a current folder.
DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
To stop playback
Press STOP.
If you press PLAY button after pressing STOP button,
playback will start from the beginning of the track.
To pause playback
Press PAUSE.
To resume, press PAUSE button again or press PLAY
button.
To skip tracks
During playback, press SKIP repeatedly.
: To skip forward.
: To skip backward.
Selecting a track in the disc
2 ways are available:
On CONTENT MENU Audio List
1) Press CONTENT MENU button.
CONTENT MENU Audio List appears.
Notes
WMA tracks copy-protected cannot be played.
The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM jack outputs MP3/WMA sounds in the linear PCM format regardless of the
current Audio out select ( page 180) selection.
You cannot change the playback speed of MP3/WMA playback.
Audio List Page
CD
MENU
CONTENT
MP3
1/ 1
001
MP3_0001
004
MP3_0004
007
MP3_0007
010
MP3_0010
002
MP3_0002
005
MP3_0005
008
MP3_0008
011
MP3_0011
003
MP3_0003
006
MP3_0006
009
MP3_0009
012
MP3_0012
File number
Current folder
If you select this icon and press ENTER button,
upper folders appear.
e.g.
Audio List Page CD
MENU
CONTENT
MP3
JPG_MP3 All
1/ 1
MP3c
MP3a MP3b
002
MP3_0002
003
MP3_0003
001
MP3_0001
004
MP3_0004
e.g.
Disc name The recorder creates temporary
folder All, which contains all
playable files.
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 06.3.20, 4:16 PM76
77
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Playable files
MP3/WMA disc compatibility with this recorder is
limited as follows:
Playable discs:
CD-ROM, CD-R
CD-RW is not recommendable.
Sampling Frequency / Bitrate:
WMA: 32 kHz / 48 kbps (CBR), VBR
44.1 kHz / 48-192 kbps (CBR), VBR
48 kHz / 128-192 kbps (CBR), VBR
MP3: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz / 8-160 kbps (CBR), VBR
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz / 32-320 kbps
(CBR), VBR
CD physical format:
Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1
File system:
ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet
File name:
A file name should be in alphabet and
numerals only, and must incorporate MP3 or
WMA extension.
e.g.********.MP3, ********.WMA
Total number of folders:
Less than 256
Total number of files:
Less than 1000
WMA codec version:
V7, V8, V9
* This recorder supports ID3v2 (ID3 Tag Version 2) of MP3,
to display text data such as names of title and artist.
Some characters may be displayed properly.
This HDD/DVD Recorder requires discs/recordings to
meet certain technical standards in order to achieve
optimal playback quality. There are many different types
of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing
MP3/WMA files). Not all recordable discs will operate or
produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria
set forth in this owner's manual are meant only as a
guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.
Please be advised that you must obtain permission from
the applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted
content, including music files, in any format, including the
MP3 and WMA formats, prior to the downloading thereof.
Toshiba has no right to grant and does not grant
permission to download any copyrighted content.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows
Logo are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
001
Track
Search
e.g.
Quick Menu
Special playback mode
Exit
Memory
Memory list
Folder repeat
Track repeat
Track random
e.g.
2) Press / / / to select a track or folder.
Pressing PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button
turns the pages.
3) Press ENTER.
If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and
3) until your favorite file appears.
Notes
•“CONTENT MENU Audio List cannot show all the tracks in
a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of proper play of
the disc.
Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
are not displayed.
Direct input of a track number
1) Press T.SEARCH.
An input window appears.
2) Input a track number using the number buttons
or ADJUST button.
3) Press ENTER.
To change the playback order
1) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
3) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER.
Memory list : To play favorite tracks only in
a favorite order.
Input a track number by using the number buttons
or ADJUST button.
To shift the cursor, press / buttons.
Folder repeat : To repeat the current folder.
Track repeat : To repeat the current file.
Track random : To play files in the current
folder in a random order.
Note
To cancel these modes, stop the playback or select the
cancel command from Quick Menu.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 06.3.20, 4:16 PM77
78
Other playback functions (Continued)
Playback
1Press DISPLAY.
The following on-screen display appears. (The actual
display varies depending on the disc.)
e.g. while playing the HDD
2Press DISPLAY again.
An expanded display appears.
(Actual display varies depending on the disc.)
e.g.
3Press DISPLAY again to turn the display off.
Operational status and setting details
Checking the current status and settings
You can confirm operational status and setting details.
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Title No./
Chapter No.
Status display
Mode indicator
Elapsed time of a title/
Elapsed time of a chapter
Playback
mode
Operating disc
Receiving
channel
e.g.
DISPLAY
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
002:
3
00:10 :29
00:05:15
0005:Stereo
Title
repeat HDD
Title
Chapter
1080i
Virtual surround
DNR (Recording)
Picture Quality
Audio Quality
Audio
Audio Output
Subtitle
Off
Off
SP
1 Stereo R Original
Bitstream
Off
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
002:
3
-00:22:01
-00:00:07
0005:Stereo
Title
repeat HDD
Title
Chapter
D/M1
Remaining time
Start
HDMI signal
resolution
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 06.3.20, 4:16 PM78
79
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Using the time bar
The time bar shows the current progress in playback or recording.
1During playback or recording, press
TIME BAR.
The time bar appears. (The actual display varies
depending on the disc.)
e.g. Playback
e.g. Recording
Locator (Shows the current location.)
Elapsed time Total playing time of a current title
(In the case of a VIDEO CD or
audio CD, it shows the total
playing time of the disc.)
Elapsed recording time (per 30 minutes)
(Recording end time if it comes within 30
minutes.)
Elapsed time
Locator (Shows the current location.)
TIME BAR
Changing the location of the time bar
While the time bar is displayed, press / .
The time bar shifts up and down.
Turning off the time bar
Press TIME BAR.
Note
Time display is an approximation.
01:30:0000:00:00
00:30:0000:00:00
00:55:00:00FLocation
00:18:00Location
Chapter division
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 06.3.20, 4:16 PM79
80
Other playback functions (Continued)
Playback
To play repeatedly (Repeat playback)
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
You can repeat a desired section.
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
Special playback mode
The sub menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing / buttons and ENTER button.
Repeat all ORG titles
To repeat all original titles in a disc.
Title repeat
To repeat the same title.
Chapter repeat
To repeat the same chapter.
A-B repeat
You can designate a portion in a title or track to repeat
continuously.
If you select A-B repeat and press ENTER button,
the following display appears. Perform steps 1 and 2
below.
e.g.
To cancel the procedure, press button.
1) Press ENTER at the beginning of the segment
(point A) you want to repeat.
The location of point A is memorized.
The display changes to Set B.
2) Press ENTER at the end of the segment
(point B).
The location of point B is memorized, and repeat
playback begins between point A and B.
Track repeat
To repeat the same track.
Disc repeat
To repeat the entire disc.
Repeat all PL titles
To repeat all playlist titles in a disc.
Cancel repeat
(in Repeat playback
mode)
To resume normal playback.
Playback of the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc stops.
Notes
Some discs may not permit repeat operation.
You cannot use the repeat playback function in conjunction
with the random playback function.
If you press STOP button during repeat playback, this
operation is canceled.
While you are performing repeat playback on the HDD or a
DVD-RAM disc, other operations ( page 62) except
stopping this operation are not available.
To play in random order (Random play)
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
You can play sections in random order.
1) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
Special playback mode
The sub menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing / buttons and ENTER button.
Title random
Plays all titles in a loaded disc in random order.
Each title is played beginning from chapter 1.
Chapter random
Plays all chapters in a current title in random order.
Track random
Plays all tracks on a loaded disc in random order.
repeat Set A
B
A
Functions in Quick Menu
Besides these examples, various other ones are introduced on respective pages for your convenience.
See page 30 on how to operate Quick Menu.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 06.3.20, 4:16 PM80
81
Recording Playback
Introduction Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Cancel random (in Random play mode)
Resumes normal playback.
Notes
Some discs may not permit random playback operation.
You cannot use the random playback function in
conjunction with the memory playback function.
You cannot use the random playback function in
conjunction with the repeat playback function.
Pressing STOP button during operation cancels random
playback.
To play in favorite order (Memory playback)
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
You can select 30 titles, chapters, or tracks and play
them in favorite order.
(To play contents in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc in
favorite order, make a playlist. For details, see
Editing on page 84.)
1) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Special playback mode,
then press ENTER.
Special playback mode
The sub menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing / buttons and ENTER button.
Memory list
If you select this and press ENTER button, the
following display appears. Perform the steps below.
e.g.
1) Input numbers of titles, chapters, or tracks by
using the number buttons, in favorite order.
Input each 3-digit number.
To input a 1- or 2-digit number, first input 0.
(e.g. 0, 0, 3.)
To cancel the numbers, press CLEAR button.
To input a chapter number, press / buttons to
shift the cursor.
01 T CT 11 T CT 21 T CT
02 T CT 12 T CT 22 T CT
03 T CT 13 T CT 23 T CT
04 T CT 14 T CT 24 T CT
05 T CT 15 T CT 25 T CT
06 T CT 16 T CT 26 T CT
07 T CT 17 T CT 27 T CT
08 T CT 18 T CT 28 T CT
09 T CT 19 T CT 29 T CT
10 T CT 20 T CT 30 T CT
2) Press / to select the next box, then perform
step 1).
To select another chapter in the same title, you do
not need to select the title number.
Repeat these steps if necessary.
You can program up to 30 selections into memory.
3) Press ENTER.
Memory playback starts.
Memory
(in normal playback
mode)
To display an entry box for one program selection.
Memory release
(in memory playback
mode)
To resume normal playback.
Memory repeat
(in memory playback
mode)
To repeat a current memory playback.
Notes
Some discs may not permit memory playback operation.
Inputting numbers of titles, chapters or tracks that a disc
does not contain will result in error.
You cannot program/change selections during memory
playback. To change selections, cancel memory playback
by pressing STOP button.
When you disconnect the power cord, the selected
memory is erased.
You can exit the memory playback display by pressing
O button.
To display the current bit rate
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Bit rate, then press
ENTER.
Bit rate
Note
To turn off the bit rate display, select this item again.
To check information on a title
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Title information, then
press ENTER.
Title information
To exit Quick Menu
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Press QUICK MENU again.
or
Press / to select Exit, then press ENTER.
Exit
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 06.3.20, 4:16 PM81
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 06.3.20, 4:16 PM82
Editing
You can create your own movie from your assembled
scenes. Save your favorite videos in DVD discs.
Creating your own title
Creating a DVD-Video using
DVD-R/RW
DVD-Video finalizing process
Other editing functions
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM83
84
Creating your own title
You can edit recorded contents and create your own library.
Editing
Note on deleting unnecessary scenes
It is not recommended that you delete many chapters from titles recorded on the HDD to remove unnecessary
parts of the titles and copy those contents on a DVD-RAM disc. The reason is that discontinuous space inside the
HDD expands and recorded contents are stored in gaps between used locations. Operating this repeatedly makes
a recording area inside the HDD broken down into small and complicated spaces. (It is called fragmentation.) Even
normal operations may get slow. Moreover, available space may not be restored by deleting or the HDD may have
protection disabling playback or recording.
When you want to delete unnecessary parts from titles, collect necessary parts of chapters to make a playlist.
Then copy the playlist and delete the original title or the playlist. For example, make a playlist and copy it to a DVD-
RAM. Then delete original titles on the HDD. It can save time and effort and retain continuity in the HDD space.
However, when moving a copy once program from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc, delete unnecessary chapters
from original titles. For details ( page 98).
Running All HDD titles delete regularly prevents fragmentation from occurring.
In addition, if you select and run HDD format, all data on the HDD will be erased. Copy TV programs you want to
save recorded on the HDD from the HDD to a DVD-RAM or DVD-R/RW disc.
When it comes to library data, back it up to a DVD-RAM disc before initializing the HDD. Then rewrite the data on
the HDD.
Editing procedure
1: Changing a name of a recorded title ( page 86)
2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters ( page 87)
3: Collecting necessary chapters ( page 92)
4: Dubbing to save ( page 97)
To save in DVD-R/RW for distribution, see page 112.
Other editing functions
Changing the picture on CONTENT MENU ( page 126)
Combining two titles (Original) into one ( page 128)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM84
85
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Basic flow
Recording a TV program
Record a TV program and it becomes a original title.
e.g.
Title: The world of cats and
dogs.
Chapter editing
Divide the original title into chapters.
Title 1: The world of cats and dogs
(Original)
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6
Divide chapters and create divisions of chapter
You can play desired scenes from the top by Chapter
Divide.
Divide chapters to edit a playlist.
Dubbing
Copy the playlist and it becomes an original title.
Playlist editing
Collect your favorite chapters to make them as one
title. (Playlist)
If an original title is deleted, a playlist will be also
deleted because playlists are fictitious titles.
e.g. Making a playlist by collecting scenes of cats from
title 1 The world of cats and dogs.
Playlist
Editing
A fictitious
playlist title
that is
different from
the original
title is
created.
Title 1: Cats world
(Playlist)
Title 1: The world of cats and dogs
(Original)
Using these editing functions to modify copyrighted content for any purpose other than your private viewing may be
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and
criminal liability.
Chapter 2Chapter 1 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM85
86
1: Changing a name of a recorded title
1Press CONTENT MENU, then press / / /
to select a title.
2Press QUICK MENU then select Title
information by pressing / from the Quick
Menu, then press ENTER.
CONTENT MENU Title information appears.
3Press QUICK MENU then select Edit title
name or Edit chapter name by pressing
/ from the Quick Menu, then press ENTER.
The character entry screen appears.
To change a title name or chapter name, see the
steps on page 36.
Start
QUICK MENU
ENTER
Title information
MENU
CONTENT
(2:06:32)
3
3/26(Su) 10:00 pm
2006/03/26 10:00pm TV:3
2006
CH
Title : 006
(0:04:15)
Media : Documentary/Culture(General)
Quality :
Rate :
Audio :
0001
Chapter :
Original
XP
Mode :
LP
2. 2
D/ M1
Off
DVD Mode :
HDD
e.g.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
Creating your own title (Continued)
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RW
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM86
87
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters
1 title is created by recording at a time, which includes 1 chapter. By dividing it into several chapters, it
will be easier to access a desired scene, and your editing or playback will be much easier.
1Press CONTENT MENU, then press / / /
to select a title.
2Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
(Continued)
To create chapters in a title, insert a chapter mark. Playback the contents, locate a point where you want to divide, then
press CHP DIVIDE button. You can insert a chapter mark also while recording, by pressing CHP DIVIDE button. (A
chapter will also be placed in the recording when you pause.)
The point divides the chapter (into two). You can create multiple chapters by repeating the above operation.
Notes
Chapters cannot be created in the following modes:
Dubbing / Fast-reverse, Fast-forward / Slow-motion
You cannot divide a title of a DVD-R/RW disc into chapters. It is possible to create chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc by pressing
CHP DIVIDE button while recording at the desired points, or by selecting an option that inserts chapter marks automatically
while recording at regular intervals. ( page 185)
Precise method
If you want to modify the chapter division, or want to place a chapter mark more precisely monitoring the
frame counter, follow the procedures below.
QUICK MENU
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
Simple method
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM87
88
3Press / to select Chapter function, then
press ENTER.
The submenu appears.
4Press / to select Chapter editing, then
press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Chapter Editing appears.
5Press PLAY to start playback.
Locate a scene where you want to insert a chapter mark.
You can use the following buttons.
PICTURE SEARCH, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,
FRAME/ADJUST, etc.
The locator shows the current position on the time bar.
And the live video plays in the upper left.
To access other chapters:
Press / buttons to move to the thumbnail display,
then press / buttons to select a desired thumbnail.
To go to the next page, press PICTURE SEARCH
button.
You can confirm the first and last scenes of a chapter.
Select a thumbnail and press ENTER button.
3 seconds of the first and last scenes are played.
ENTER
ENTER
PLAY
00:54:30
00:00:00:03F
00:00:00
4:3
B
Chapter Editing
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
Divide
Title:004 Chapter:0001
HDD
EDIT
MENU
Fishing Guide
e.g.
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
Chapter editing
Auto chapter create
Creating your own title 2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM88
89
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
6At a point where you want to make a chapter
division, press PAUSE.
The picture pauses.
7Press / / / to select Divide, then press
ENTER.
A chapter division is created at the selected location,
and the first scene of the new chapter is registered as a
chapter thumbnail.
8Repeat steps 5 to 7.
Locations of chapter division are indicated by the markers on the
time bar.
To erase a chapter division, see Merging chapters ( page 91).
9When all chapter divisions have been made,
press .
The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the
chapter divisions on the time bar.
When complete, CONTENT MENU is displayed.
PAUSE
ENTER
00:54:30
00:00:21:24F
00:00:00
4:3
B
Chapter Editing
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
Divide
Title:004 Chapter:0001
HDD
EDIT
MENU
Fishing Guide
e.g.
00:54:30
00:00:21:24F
00:00:00
4:3
B
Chapter Editing
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
Divide
Title:004 Chapter:0001
HDD
EDIT
MENU
Fishing Guide
e.g.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM89
90
Notes
This recorder supports a limited number of chapters on a
disc. If exceeded, a message appears. In this event,
reduce the number of chapters by merging chapters. (
page 91)
•“EDIT MENU Chapter Editing can also be viewed by
selecting Chapter Editing from EDIT MENU Main
Menu.
To exit EDIT MENU Main Menu, press EDIT MENU
button.
Making chapters in a title (Original) does not affect the
related titles (Playlist).
There may be a small difference between a location you
marked and a chapter division actually played.
Pausing a recording automatically creates a chapter
division.
During relay recording ( page 56), a chapter division is
automatically created at the start point of relay record.
If you create chapters in a title which is stored in the HDD
and copy the title to a DVD-R/RW, the chapter divisions
may shift.
Creating chapters automatically when
recording
You can create chapter marks from the beginning of
a title at regular intervals automatically. (Chapter
marks are added to those already existing.)
This is convenient for long programs, such as live
sports games.
1) Perform steps 1 to 4 on pages 87 to 88.
2) Press / to select Auto chapter create,
then press ENTER.
3) Press / to select a chapter division
interval, then press ENTER.
Chapter divisions are automatically marked at the
selected intervals.
Editing chapter break
You can adjust positions of chapter marks. You can
shift the beginning of a chapter currently selected.
1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on page 87 to 88.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / to select Chapter break edit
mode, then press ENTER.
4) Press / to select the item, then press
ENTER.
by frame (VR mode)
The chapter mark shifts by one frame.
For contents which will be copied to DVD-RAM
discs.
by GOP (Video mode)
The chapter mark shifts by a GOP (about 0.5
second), which is a unit of editing in DVD-Video
format.
For contents which will be copied to DVD-R/RW.
5) Press / to select a chapter whose
beginning you want to shift.
6) Press FRAME (II / II) repeatedly until a
desired scene appears.
Select a point while monitoring the thumbnail,
which changes as you press the button.
To operate other chapters, press / buttons to
select another, then follow the above steps.
7) When complete, press QUICK MENU, and
select Chapter break edit mode off (by
frame) or Chapter Break Edit Mode off (by
GOP) then press ENTER.
The recorder exits the adjusting mode.
Notes
You cannot shift a chapter mark beyond the adjacent
chapter marks or a logical gap on recorded data within a
chapter.
Shifting a chapter mark restores a thumbnail to the
beginning of a chapter. This may occur also on the
previous chapter depending on the data condition.
1
1
5432
Main Menu
Chapter Editing
Chapters can be divided on frame
basis. Chapters can be merged and
assigned names.
Title
Merge
Divide
Source
Edit Functions
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
Del Selected Items
DVD-Video Finalizing
Playlist Editing
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
HDD
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
Creating your own title 2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM90
91
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Merging chapters
1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on pages 87 to 88, to
view the EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display.
2) Press / / / to highlight a chapter.
Pressing PICTURE SEARCH button can access
preceding or following pages.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select an item.
Merge with previous cptr:
To delete the chapter division between the selected
chapter and the previous one.
Merge with following cptr:
To delete the chapter division between the selected
chapter and the succeeding one.
Merge all chapters:
To merge all chapters in the title.
5) Press ENTER.
e.g. When Merge with previous cptr is selected:
The selected chapter is merged into the previous
chapter and its thumbnail is erased.
Notes
To turn off EDIT MENU Main Menu, press EDIT MENU
button.
When chapters are merged, the numerical value of
following chapters will decrease correspondingly.
Merging chapters does not affect the related titles
(Playlist). You can also merge chapters in the title (Playlist).
In this case, the title (Original) is not affected.
You can access the feature of merging chapters also from
Quick Menu on CONTENT MENU Chapter List.
Naming a chapter
1) From EDIT MENU Chapter Editing, select a
chapter which you want to name.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / / / to select Edit Chapter
Name, then press ENTER.
A keyboard appears.
Enter a name following the on-screen icon guides.
Notes
There is a limit to the number of chapters which can be
named. If exceeded, a message appears.
You can also access the keyboard to enter a chapter name
by selecting a chapter with PICTURE SEARCH button on
CONTENT MENU Title Information, and by selecting Edit
chapter name from the Quick Menu on CONTENT MENU
Chapter List.
You can change chapter names also on a DVD-R/RW disc,
if the disc is not finalized yet.
00:54:3000:00:00
B
Chapter Create
00:00:00:03F
4:3
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
Divide
2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
HDD
EDIT
MENU Quick Menu
Chapter break edit mode
Merge with previous cptr
Merge with following cptr
Merge all chapters
Auto chapter create
Exit
Edit chapter name
e.g.
00:54:3000:00:00
B
Chapter Editing
00:00:00:03F
4:3
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
Divide
2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 06.3.20, 4:16 PM91
92
3: Collecting necessary scenes
Create a Playlist to omit unnecessary scenes for dubbing, or compile desired scenes.
1Press CONTENT MENU.
CONTENT MENU Title List appears.
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
2Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
3Press / to select Edit function, then
press ENTER.
Submenu appears.
HDD
DVD-RAM
CONTENT MENU
QUICK MENU
ENTER
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Playlist editing
Original title combination
Playlist(Mon-Fri)
Playlist(everyweek)
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
Start
Creating your own title (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 06.3.20, 4:16 PM92
93
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4Press / to select Playlist editing, then
press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Playlist editing appears.
5
Press / / / to select a title or chapter
.
To select between titles and chapters, press button
.
6Press ENTER.
A cursor appears, indicating the point where the
selected item will be inserted.
(Continued)
Cursor
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
A
B
Source:Title
Object :Title
Original
PlayList
StartTitle: Entire Time:
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Playlist
Editing
AAA
BB
Source:Title
Object :Title
Original
PlayList
StartTitle: Entire Time:
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Playlist
Editing
AAA
BB
Source:Title
Object :Title
Original
PlayList
StartTitle: Entire Time:
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Playlist
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 06.3.20, 4:16 PM93
94
7Press / to select a point where you want to
insert the item, then press ENTER.
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press ENTER button.
The selected part is inserted at the location of the
cursor.
8Repeat steps 5 to 7 to insert items.
To cancel the selection, see Canceling selection of a part
( page 95).
9When all items have been inserted, press .
The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the
Playlist.
When completed, CONTENT MENU is displayed.
Notes
You can access EDIT MENU Playlist Editing also by selecting Playlist editing on EDIT MENU.
If you delete titles and chapters (Original), the corresponding titles and chapters (Playlist) are also deleted. Contrarily, if you
delete titles and chapters (Playlist), the corresponding titles and chapters (Original) are not deleted.
Playback may pause if a gap between the content is played.
There may be a small difference between the chapter boundary and the actual playback picture.
A title or chapter which is being edited cannot be selected as an item.
You cannot add a title of still pictures, or a title or a chapter which contains both still and moving pictures, to a playlist.
By copying (dubbing) a Playlist, a title (Original) of the same contents is created.
You cannot program a Playlist of contents recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc.
Down arrow on the thumbnails means: Orange: This title already selected. Green trimmed: Some chapters in this title already
selected. Green: This chapter already selected.
A black thumbnail with Recording means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 10 seconds. This
thumbnail cannot start playback.
ENTER
AAA
BB
Source:Title
Object :Title
Original
PlayList
StartTitle: 2006/05/07 10:30am 00:13:45
Entire Time:
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Playlist
Editing
Creating your own title 3: Collecting necessary scenes (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 06.3.20, 4:16 PM94
95
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Canceling selection of a part
1) From EDIT MENU Playlist editing, press
/ / / to select a part to cancel.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select Cancel selected title,
then press ENTER.
The part you have selected is canceled.
Confirming the first and last scenes of a part or
a Playlist
You can play the first and last 3 seconds of a scene
(Preview). (If a title contains several chapters, the first
and last scenes of the chapters are also played.)
Preview of a part:
1) At step 5 on page 93, select a title or a
chapter, then press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Preview, then press
ENTER.
Preview of all parts:
1) Move the cursor to an any part (in the lower
area), then press QUICK MENU button.
2) Press / to select Preview all playlists, then
press ENTER.
Confirming the title information
1) At step 5 on page 93, select a title or a
chapter, then press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Title information then
press ENTER.
Correcting a Playlist
You can add or delete parts to correct a Playlist.
1) From CONTENT MENU, select a playlist to
correct.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / to select Playlist re-editing and
then press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Playlist editing appears.
Follow the procedure from steps 5 on page 93,
add or delete parts as necessary.
Note
You cannot edit a title (Playlist) of still pictures, or a title
(Playlist) which contains both still and moving pictures.
Using a part in a Playlist also in another Playlist
1) Press EDIT MENU.
EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
2) Press / / / to select Playlist editing,
then press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Playlist editing appears.
3) Press / / / to select Start then press
ENTER.
The areas of title name and part selection become
blank.
4) Following the procedures outlined on page
93, make a Playlist.
Naming a title (Playlist)
1) From EDIT MENU Playlist editing, move a
cursor to the lower side (selected parts) then
press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Edit title name, then
press ENTER.
A keyboard appears.
3) Following the procedures outlined on page
36, enter a title name.
Note
You can name a title also while viewing its information.
From CONTENT MENU Title List, select a title and press
QUICK MENU button then select Title Information by
/ buttons and ENTER button. Further press QUICK
MENU button, and select Edit title name by / buttons
and ENTER button.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 06.3.20, 4:16 PM95
96
Making a Playlist of recorded contents where
starting times are the same (i.e. daily or weekly
recordings)
This will help to sort serials.
1) From CONTENT MENU Title List, press
QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Edit function, then press
ENTER.
3) Press / to select the item.
Playlist(Mon-Fri)
To sort out programs recorded on the same time on
Monday to Friday to make a Playlist.
Playlist(every week)
To sort out programs recorded on the same time of
the same day of the week to make a Playlist.
4) Press ENTER.
Notes
Only titles (Original) can be sorted.
The maximum number of sorted titles on a DVD-RAM disc
is 99.
If you modify the recording start time or date of one of the
recorded serials, the title will not be sorted out. Contrarily,
any program can be sorted if its channel, recording start
time and date are modified as the same as others.
•“Playlist(Mon-Fri) can sort titles even if they are not
complete 5 collections of Monday to Friday, on the
condition that they have the same channel and recording
start time, and exclude Saturday and Sunday.
Creating your own title 3: Collecting necessary scenes (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 06.3.20, 4:16 PM96
97
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4: Dubbing to save
You can dub (copy or move) contents recorded in the HDD or DVD-RAM/R/RW, between HDD and DVD-RAM
drive or within the same drives.
Learn about dubbing on this recorder to select the best method.
A: High speed dubbing
You can copy recorded contents without changing
the picture and sound quality.
High speed means the dubbing time is shorter
than the actual time of the content.
Use this function on the purposes such as the
followings:
when you copy a whole title to a DVD-RAM/R/
RW disc.
when you convert a Playlist into an Original title
(produce an Original title from a Playlist)
High speed dubbing of several contents - Dub
selected items
You can select titles and chapters and copy them
all at once.
B: Rate conversion dubbing
You can copy content and change its data size from the
original recording.
Use this function on the purposes such as the
followings:
When you have recorded a content on the HDD
at a high rate, and you cannot copy it to a DVD-
RAM disc because the data size is too large. (
Reduce the data size.)
When you recorded a content while DVD
compatible mode ( page 184) was set to
Off, and you cannot copy it to a DVD-R/RW in
the DVD-Video format; or when a DVD-RAM
disc was recorded with the other equipment
which is not compatible with this recorders
recording format, and you want to copy it to a
DVD-R/RW ( Set DVD compatible mode to
Main or SAP.)
Rate conversion dubbing of several parts
You can select titles and chapters and change the
data size and copy them all at once.
Use this function when you unify the compatibility
of several titles and contents all at once.
C: Line-U dubbing
You can record pictures recorded which is being
played.
Use this function when you want to copy contents
in DVD-R/RW recorded on other device, which
cannot show thumbnails in CONTENT MENU
Title List, to the HDD.
All the above functions can copy data as original
digital signals. Rate conversion dubbing and Line-
U dubbing, however, needs data processing and
may deteriorate the original picture and sound
quality. Also, it is not possible to improve the picture
and sound quality by the Rate conversion dubbing at
increased bit rate.
Dubbing a whole title or a chapter
Converting a title (Playlist) into a title
(Original)
Dubbing a title reducing its data size
Dubbing a title which is being played
Dubbing titles recorded on the HDD to
DVD-R/RW for distribution to DVD player
users
Purpose Operation
A: High speed dubbing ( page 100)
B: Rate conversion dubbing ( page 106)
C: Line-U dubbing ( page 110)
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW
( page 112)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM97
98
Copy and Move
This recorders Dubbing has the following two
definitions:
Copy:
The original program remains after the operation is
completed.
Move:
The moved program will be erased from the original
location after the operation is completed.
Whether or not you select either command depends
entirely on the given situation. The command may be
predetermined in some situations.
You cannot move contents in the following situations.
(Instead, you will want to copy them.)
The content is protected ( page 56).
A specified portion of the title (chapter) is copy-
protected, in which case, you cannot move from
DVD-RAM to the HDD.
You cannot move a Playlist. Only copying is
permitted. When you copy a Playlist to a disc, it will
be treated an Original on the disc. The original
Playlist does not change to an Original.
Also, you cannot move or copy contents in the
following situations:
The recorded content contains a program that
permits a single copy only.
The title (Playlist) contains a portion that prohibits
copying. Edit the title from the Original and create a
new Playlist.
Notes
If either the HDD or DVD-RAM is not in optimum physical
condition, an error may occur when you execute Move
and some titles or chapters may be lost. If you want to
Move non-copy-protected titles and chapters, it is
recommended for safety that you first Copy them to the
opposite drive and confirm they have been copied properly.
Then delete the titles and chapters to which you have
executed Move.
The recorder cannot copy/move the following discs:
DVD-VIDEO
VIDEO CD
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
If you cannot copy/move for some other reason, such as
insufficient disc capacity, etc., a message will appear on
screen. In such a case, follow the instructions in the
message.
Depending on the content, associated information such as
data management may not be copied/moved.
You cannot copy/move titles containing still pictures.
Dubbing to DVD-R/RW may divide the original title
depending on the contents. Also, the DVD-Video format
recording ( page 112) may shift thumbnails.
A part with aspect ratio 16:9 recorded at bit rate 1.0Mbps
or 1.4Mbps cannot be dubbed to a DVD-R/RW. Change the
aspect ratio to 4:3.
•“High speed dubbing ( page 100) and A: High speed
dubbing (Dubbing specified parts together) ( page 102)
procedures always comply with Aspect ratio(Video mode)
setting ( page 184).
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
Line-U
dubbing
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
Rate
conversion
dubbing of
several parts
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
Rate
conversion
dubbing
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
High speed
Library
dubbing of
several parts
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
No
High speed
Library
dubbing
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
No
To
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R/RW
(Not finalized yet)
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
DVD-R/RW
From
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R/RW
It is not possible to copy to a DVD-R/RW of DVD-VR mode.
•“High speed dubbing between the HDD and a DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment is not possible.
•“High speed dubbing to a finalized DVD-R/RW is not possible.
•“Line-U dubbing using a DVD-R/RW which was recorded on other equipment and is not finalized yet is not possible.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM98
99
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Recording and playback while dubbing
Dubbing process by High speed dubbing and Dub selected items procedures will allow you to make a recording or
playback of other titles.
Notes
Timer programmed recording have priority over other operations. Dubbing may be stopped if a timer program recording
starts.
While recording and dubbing are in progress at the same time, CONTENT MENU and LIBRARY MENU will not appear.
Playing a recorded title while recording another on the same disc ( page 48), is not possible while dubbing.
HDD DVD
HDD HDD
HDD
HDD
DVDDVD
DVD
HDD
DVD DVD
Playback
Available
Not available
Not available
Available
Recording
Available
Not available
Not available
Available
Recording
Not available
Not available
Available
Not available
Playback
Not available
Not available
Available
Not available
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM99
100
A: High speed dubbing (Dubbing only a specified part)
This section explains how to dub a specific title or chapter. To select several parts and dub them all at once, refer to
page 102.
1Press CONTENT MENU, then press / / /
to select a title.
2Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3Press / to select High speed dubbing
from the Quick Menu, then press ENTER.
CONTENT MENU High Speed Library Dubbing
appears.
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
2006/03/30 09:00pm TV:4
High Speed Library Dubbing
MENU
CONTENT
(0:52:40)
Original
(Saves Original)
(Deletes Original)
Move
(Saves Original)
Same Disc
Copy
e.g.
(Saves Original)
Network
Start
QUICK MENU
ENTER
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM100
101
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4Press / to select Copy, Move, Same
Disc or Network.
Copy:
After the operation is completed, a specified part will
remain on the disc where it was previously located.
Move:
A part will move to the opposite disc and will be erased
from the disc where it was previously located.
Same Disc:
A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied
part will become another title.
This operation is useful to change a Playlist to Original.
Network:
To copy to another TOSHIBA DVD recorder within the
same network.
See Network Navi ( page 141).
Copy or Move is automatically selected in the
following cases.
Copy:
When a specified title (or chapter) is a Playlist.
When a specified title (or chapter) is locked ( page 56).
Move:
When a specified title (or chapter) is copy-protected.
5Press ENTER.
Copying starts.
The job progress is displayed on the screen and the
front panel display.
When the job finishes, the graph disappears and the
buzzer sounds.
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job finishes.
(1) During the operation, press QUICK MENU button.
(2) Press / buttons to select Auto power off.
(3) Press ENTER button.
Notes
A title or a chapter becomes a title by being copied.
•“Same Disc job using a DVD-RAM disc will take a longer time.
•“Same Disc is not available on DVD-R/RW.
•“Move is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW.
Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.
For a copy-once permitted content, only moving from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc is available. Executing this will delete the
original content in the HDD, and the one moved to a DVD-RAM will not be able to moved or copied.
•“High speed dubbing is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.
If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute High speed dubbing on
the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute All
HDD titles delete ( page 186).
To cancel copying halfway through the
operation
1) While copying, press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Cancel dubbing, then
press ENTER.
ENTER
ENTER
Notes
Cancellation of a copying operation will result in deletion of
a portion of the title or chapter already copied.
Cancellation of a copying to a DVD-R cannot restore the
disc space in the DVD-R.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM101
102
A: High speed dubbing (Dubbing specified parts together)
This section explains how to copy several specific titles or chapters. Assigned names of titles/chapters or other
information can also be copied. A title or chapter becomes a title by being copied.
1Press HDD or DVD to select a disc that
contains titles or chapters you want to copy.
2Press EDIT MENU.
3Press / to select Dub Selected Items,
then press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Dub Selected Items appears.
Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the
upper area.
To change the dubbing destination:
1) Press QUICK MENU button.
2) Press / buttons to select Change media to HDD
or Change Media to DVD.
3) Press ENTER button.
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
EDIT MENU
ENTER
AAA
B
Dub Selected
Items Title
Dub To: DVD
Original
Start
Capacity
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Source will be Title.
Start
DVD
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM102
103
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4Press / / / to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy.
To go to the next or previous page, press PICTURE
SEARCH ( / ) button.
To select a chapter, first select the title that contains
the chapter you want, then press button.
To go back to the title display, press button again.
5Press ENTER.
A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).
6Press / to select a location to place the
selected part, then press ENTER.
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press ENTER button.
The selected part is inserted into the location of the
cursor.
(Continued)
A
B
Title
Original
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Dub To: DVD
Dub Selected
Items
Source will be Title.
ENTER
A
B
Title
Original
Start
Capacity
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Dub To: DVD
Dub Selected
Items
Source will be Title.
Cursor
ENTER
ENTER
AAA
BB
Title
Original
Start
Capacity
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Dub To: DVD
Dub Selected
Items
Source will be Title.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM103
104
7Repeat steps 4 to 6.
You can confirm the available space of the destination media via
the bar at the bottom of the display.
Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media
as a title.
To cancel selection of an individual part, see page 105.
8Press / to select “Start”, press ENTER, and
select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
The broadcast picture appears and dubbing starts.
The progress for each title is displayed on the screen
and in the front panel display on the recorder. The
buzzer sounds when the operation is completed.
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job is completed.
1) During the job, press QUICK MENU button.
2) Press / buttons to select Auto power off.
3) Press ENTER button.
Notes
This procedure of Dub Selected Items of specified parts does not move them. If you do not want to leave the items on the
original disc, delete them in the procedure for Deleting recorded contents ( page 55).
To confirm the contents of an item, first select the item by using / / / buttons and press QUICK MENU button to
display Quick Menu. Press / buttons to select Preview (or Title information) then press ENTER button.
Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom of the menu for about 2 seconds.
•“High speed dubbing is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.
Dubbing procedures to DVD-R/RW always comply with Aspect ratio(Video mode) setting ( page 184).
Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.
If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute High speed dubbing on
the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute All
HDD titles delete ( page 186).
ENTER
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.23, 8:52 AM104
105
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Cancelling selection of an item
1) Press / / / to select an item then press
QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Cancel selected title (or
All clear for cancelling selection of multiple
items at a time).
3) Press ENTER.
Changing the position of an item
Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the
item, then repeat steps 4 to 6 on page 103 to
insert the item into its desired location.
Cancelling while dubbing
Press QUICK MENU to display Quick Menu. Press
/ to select Cancel dubbing, then press
ENTER.
Note
This procedure copies items according to their order
indicated in the lower area. Therefore, there may be a case
that some items have already been copied at the time you
cancel dubbing.
AAA
B
B
Dub Selected Items
Title
Original
Start
Capacity
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Dub To: DVD
Quick Menu
Cancel selected title
Preview
Preview all selected items
Title information
Clear all selected items
Auto power off
Exit
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM105
106
B: Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate)
You can reduce the recorded picture or sound rate when copying. This procedure enables content originally
recorded onto the HDD at high rate setting to be dubbed onto a DVD-RAM disc at a reduced bit rate.
Use the Rate conversion dubbing when
you recorded a lengthy content on the HDD using the manual high rate, and it is too large to dub onto the DVD-RAM
disc.
you recorded a title with setting the DVD compatible mode ( page 184) to Off, and you want to make a
DVD-R/RW disc for that title, or you used another recorder to record a title on a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to
create a DVD-R/RW disc for that title (Set DVD compatible mode to Main or SAP then execute this procedure).
The Rate conversion dubbing can be performed in two different ways: part by part or multiple parts in one time. (To
dub multiple parts in one time, the same rate is applied to all parts. You cannot set a different rate to each part.)
1Press HDD or DVD to select a disc containing
the parts that you want to dub.
2Press CONTENT MENU, then press / / /
to select a title.
3Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
4Press / to select Rate conversion
dubbing, then press ENTER.
CONTENT MENU Rate Conversion Dub appears.
Rate conversion dubbing for part by part
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
QUICK MENU
ENTER
2006/03/30 08:00pm TV:12
Rate conversion dubbing
MENU
CONTENT
(0:52:40) Original
(Saves Original)
(Saves Original)
Same Disc
Copy
e.g.
Select Quick Menu to modify bitrate.
Higher bitrate for copied media will not improve quality.
All chapter marks will be deleted.
2.0
D/M2
LP
2.0
D/M2
LP
Original Copy
Result
Start
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM106
107
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
5Press / to select “Copy” or “Same Disc”.
Copy:
After the operation is completed, a specified part will
remain on the disc where it was previously located.
Same Disc:
A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied
part will become another title.
6Confirm picture and sound rates.
To make changes, follow the procedure below.
1) Press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu.
2) Press / buttons to select an item then press
ENTER button.
User record quality:
The current settings you have made ( page 183) are
listed. Press ADJUST (-/+) button to select a desired
setting.
Auto rate selection:
The recorder automatically selects the highest possible
rate, calculating from current unoccupied volume on the
disc. (This operation does not insure full recording of any
length program or whole use of unoccupied volume.)
7Press ENTER.
Copying starts.
To confirm the job progress, press TIME BAR button to
display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)
When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the
current broadcast picture appears.
Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for
monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may
vary.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
ENTER
ENTER
2004/06/11 08:00pm TV:12
Rate conversion dubbing
MENU
CONTENT
(0:52:40)
Original
(Saves Original)
(Saves Original)
Same Disc
Copy
e.g.
Quick Menu
User record quality
Auto rate selection
Auto power off
Exit
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.23, 8:52 AM107
108
1Press HDD or DVD to select a disc containing
the parts you want to dub.
2Press EDIT MENU.
EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
3Press / to select Rate Conv. Items, then
press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Rate Conv. Items appears.
4Collect parts to be dubbed, using steps 4 to 6
on page 103.
Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media
as a title.
You can cancel selection of an individual part.
1) Press / / / buttons to select an item then press QUICK
MENU button.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / buttons to select Cancel selected title (or All
clear for cancelling selection of multiple items at a time).
3) Press ENTER button.
Rate Conversion Dubbing for multiple parts
EDIT MENU
ENTER
A
B
Rate Conv. Items
Title
Original
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Dub To: DVD
Start
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM108
109
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
5Check the rate for picture and sound quality.
To change the setting, perform the following steps.
1) Press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu.
2) Press / buttons to select User record quality and press
ENTER button.
3) Press ADJUST ( / ) button to select the setting number
and press ENTER button.
When Copy on the bottom shows X, the selected parts are
beyond the disc capacity. Change the rate for picture and sound
quality or reduce parts to dub.
6Press / to select Start, and select Yes,
then press ENTER.
Copying starts.
To confirm the job progress, press TIME BAR button to
display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)
When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the
current broadcast picture appears.
Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for
monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may vary.
Cancelling dubbing during rate conversion
dubbing
1) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Cancel dubbing.
3) Press ENTER.
Note
A portion of content from the start of recording to the
moment you cancel dubbing will be copied.
Turning off the power automatically after
dubbing
1) While dubbing, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select Auto power off.
3) Press ENTER.
Notes
Unlike High speed dubbing, Rate conversion dubbing may
cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of
recorded content. The time required for dubbing is about
the same as the playback time of the content.
Quality will not be improved even if you select a rate higher
than original content.
Rate conversion dubbing to the same DVD-RAM/R/RW
disc is not possible.
The recorder automatically inserts a black picture for a
moment before and after the new title produced by this
recording process.
You cannot use the Rate Conversion Dubbing for copying
from a DVD-RAM disc to another DVD-RAM disc.
During Rate conversion dubbing, the relay recording
function ( page 185) is disabled even if Relay
Recording is set to On.
During Rate conversion dubbing, switching the audio
channel is not possible.
Audio processed under the Rate conversion dubbing is
recorded in stereo.
When you record an SAP program and play it back, the
main and sub sound are output at the same time. Select
the sound by pressing AUDIO button.
When you set DVD compatible Mode to Main or SAP
( page 184), only a selected sound (the main or sub
sound) of the SAP program is recorded. (Stereo
broadcasting is recorded as stereo).
If you perform the Rate conversion dubbing for a Playlist,
containing a chapter that is the beginning of the Original
title at recording, one frame at the beginning will be
removed.
During Rate conversion dubbing, P in P function (
page 70) is disabled.
Rate conversion dubbing to DVD-R/RW selects aspect
ratio according to the first title of dubbed items.
Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom
of the menu for about 2 seconds.
ENTER
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM109
110
C: Line-U dubbing (Recording pictures while viewing them)
You can record the picture being played back in either disc, or to the other disc, if the content is not copy-protected.
This procedure can be used also to copy contents of a DVD-R/RW you created ( page 112), back to the HDD.
Preparation
Make sure that the destination disc has adequate available remaining space.
When you want to copy to the HDD, load a disc you want to play.
Example: To copy from a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD
1Press INPUT SELECT or CH/Page repeatedly
to select LineU.
A black screen appears.
2Press HDD.
3Press REC.
Recording starts.
4Press DVD.
5Start playing.
Line U
Stereo
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
INPUT SELECT
CH/Page
HDD
REC
DVD
PLAY
Start
Creating your own title 4: Dubbing to save (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM110
111
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
6When playback of contents you want to copy
is finished, press STOP.
Playing stops, and a black screen returns.
7Press HDD.
8Press STOP.
Recording stops.
Notes
The following combinations of a source and a destination disc are possible.
HDD to HDD, HDD to DVD-RAM, HDD to DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM to HDD, DVD-R/RW to HDD
A title dubbed by this procedure has black pictures at both the beginning and the end of the title. Therefore thumbnails in
CONTENT MENU may be black. If you change the thumbnail, see page 126.
You can record still pictures and slow pictures during playback.
Contents of DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD and audio CD cannot be recorded with Line-U dubbing.
•“Line-U dubbing may cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of contents.
Screen menus such as CONTENT MENU or EDIT MENU cannot be recorded by Line-U dubbing.
•“Line-U dubbing cannot be set as programme recording.
When doing this procedure, programmed recording must not be initiated. If you display TV Guide On Screen®, playback is
automatically canceled.
When setting the input to Line-U, audio output is set to stereo automatically. You cannot switch the audio channel. During
Line-U dubbing, you can change the audio output.
Accompanying audio content to be recorded with Line-U dubbing is always in stereo.
During Line-U dubbing, the virtual surround function ( page 180) is disabled.
Even if Relay recording is set to On ( page 185), the relay recording function is disabled during Line-U dubbing.
For Line-U dubbing, a scene permitting copy-once cannot be copied.
During Line-U dubbing, P in P function ( page 70) is disabled.
HDD
STOP
STOP
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM111
112
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW
Content stored on the HDD of the recorder can be edited and copied to a DVD-R/RW, a popular media for
distribution, and played on a compatible DVD video player.
Notice
Beforehand confirm the contents of a disc.
If you use a DVD-R disc, prepare a new one. This DVD-Video creation procedure is possible only once per disc
on this recorder. Once you have copied to a DVD-R, you cannot redo, add, delete, or correct the copied contents
in the disc. If you start copying then cancel the job, you cannot re-use the DVD-R.
If you use a DVD-RW, be sure to confirm the contents in it. This procedure overwrites a whole disc, and all of the
contents in a DVD-RW will be lost. If you want to add contents to a DVD-RW, do not use this procedure. Record
directly or make a dubbing to the DVD-RW, then execute the finalization ( page 122). This procedure includes
the finalizing process, and you will not be able to add, delete, or correct contents to a DVD-RW later, as it will
have been finalized. If a finalized DVD-RW has remaining space, you can add contents there if you cancel the
finalizing process of the DVD-RW ( page 125).
Do not start copying to a DVD-R/RW when programmed recording is scheduled to begin shortly.
Copying entirely to a DVD-R/RW will take 1 hour and a half (variable depending on the contents). (This does not
include time for Writing Test. This option requires more time. Actual time for Writing Test depends on the
contents to test, and may be longer than the playing time of the contents if the disc contains too little contents or
too many quality and picture settings, etc.)
If a start time of a programmed recording comes during this procedure, the recording is made onto the HDD.
However, while making a menu theme, the recording is not executed. Also, programmed recordings to DVD
media with Off setting of Relay recording ( page 185) are not executed.
If a programmed recording starts during this procedure, you cannot continue to make another disc after
completion of the first disc.
Ensure the compatibility of a disc.
Refer to the page 9.
* Discs made by this procedure will comply with the DVD-Video standard. However, it is not guaranteed to play
properly on all DVD video players (including TOSHIBA products).
Depending on the disc, there may be a difference of data capacity between DVD-R and DVD-RW. It may be
possible that contents you have just recorded onto a DVD-R cannot be recorded onto a DVD-RW. (DVD-RW
capacity may be smaller.)
Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.
Preparation
Record contents which you want to copy to DVD-R/RW disc to make DVD-Video, to the HDD with the following
settings:
- DVD compatible mode ( page 184): Main or SAP.
- Bit rate of 4.0 or more.
Load a new DVD-R/RW disc. (Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.)
Press HDD button to select the HDD mode.
Notes
If you recorded a title while setting DVD compatible mode ( page 184) to Off or you used another recorder to record a
title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to copy such a title to a DVD-R/RW to create a DVD-Video, first set DVD compatible
mode to Main or SAP then execute the procedure of Rate conversion dubbing for multiple parts ( page 108).
Depending on the disc, DVD-R 4x speed compatibility may be disabled.
DVD-RW
DVD-R
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 06.3.20, 4:16 PM112
113
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
EDIT MENU
ENTER
ENTER
AAA
BB
DVD-Video Create
(Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Original
Next
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Creating Media: DVD
Capacity
AAA
B
DVD-Video Create
(Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Original
Next
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Creating Media: DVD
Capacity
1
1
5432
Main Menu
Chapter Editing
Chapters can be divided on frame
basis. Chapters can be merged and
assigned names.
Title
Merge
Divide
Source
Edit Functions
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
Del Selected Items
DVD-Video Finalizing
Playlist Editing
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
HDD
e.g. EDIT
MENU
Start
1Press EDIT MENU.
EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
2Press / to select DVD-Video Creation,
then press ENTER.
EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items)
appears.
Thumbnails of titles on the HDD are displayed in the
upper area.
3Press / / / to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy to a DVD-R/RW disc.
To go to the preceding or following page, press
PICTURE SEARCH button.
To select a chapter, first select the title that contains
the chapter you want, then press button.
To return to the title display, press button again.
(Continued)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 06.3.20, 4:16 PM113
114
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued)
Editing
4Press ENTER.
A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).
5Press / to select a location to place the
selected part, then press ENTER.
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press ENTER button.
The selected part is inserted into the location of the
cursor.
6Repeat steps 3 to 5.
You can check the available volume of a DVD-R/RW on the bar at
the bottom of the menu.
Each of the assembled parts is recorded onto the destination
media as a title.
To cancel selected parts see page 120.
To change the title/chapter name or thumbnail before selecting:
1) Select the part that you want to change, and press QUICK
MENU button.
2) Press the / buttons to select Edit title name or Modify
title thumbnail to change the title, or Edit chapter name or
Modify chapter thumbnail to change the chapter, and press
ENTER button.
3) Use the entry screen to change the title or chapter name.
To change a title thumbnail or a chapter thumbnail, see the
steps on page 126.
Cursor
ENTER
AAA
BB
DVD-Video Create
(Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Original
Next
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Creating Media: DVD
Capacity
ENTER
AAA
B
DVD-Video Create
(Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Original
Next
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Creating Media: DVD
Capacity
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 06.3.20, 4:16 PM114
115
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
7Press / to select Next, then press
ENTER.
A screen is displayed to select options.
8Press / / / to set the items.
For the instruction of setting, see the description shown
at selection.
When you have selected Parts Test or All Test for
Writing Test, extra time is required for pre-writing
test. All Test requires more time than Parts Test.
If you select None for Menu Create:
The setting of Start Play and Start after playing one
title is skipped automatically.
9Press / to select Next, then press
ENTER.
A screen is displayed to confirm the information you are
going to write.
Press button to select Edit Name and press ENTER
button to go to the character entry screen. The number of
characters is limited for the disc name you can enter.
If you selected None for Menu Create at step 8,
select Writing on the bottom right corner, and press
ENTER button. Skip to step 14.
(Continued)
ENTER
AAA
B
B
DVD Video Creation(Option Settings)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
NextReturn
Menu Create Title+Chapter Title Chapter None
Writing Test None Parts Test All Test
Set Aspect Ratio Original 4:3 fixed 16:9 fixed
Start Play
Menu
Title 1
After play one title
After play final title
Menu
Next Title
Menu
Title 1
Stop
ENTER
ENTER
AAA
BB
DVD Video Creation(Disc Information)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
NextReturn
Disc name
11
1 hour 24 min.
Edit Name
Total title number
Total time
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 06.3.20, 4:16 PM115
116
10
Press to select Next, then press ENTER.
A display of title menu selection appears if Menu
Create is set to Title+Chapter or Title at step 7.
To view your captured images ( page 119), go to the
next page.
If you press button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press O button.
While displaying a preview screen of your captured
image, you can access the other menu to correct color
( page 119) by pressing button.
11
Press / / / to select the menu, then
press ENTER.
If you have set Menu Create to Title+Chapter or
Chapter at step 7, a screen is displayed to select a
chapter menu.
12
Press / / / to select the chapter menu.
The selected menu is set for all chapters.
You cannot set it for each chapter individually.
If you press button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press O button.
If you press button to select Return while previewing
and press ENTER button, you will return to the preview
of the title menu. To go back to the chapter menu, press
/ / / button to select a number next to Chapter
Menu on the bottom center.
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued)
Editing
ENTERENTER
AAA
BB
DVD Video Creation(Title Menu Select)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Deep Blue Olive Sepia Light Blue
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Orange Cyber Green Lavender Cyber Red
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSM R. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSM R. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
1/ 2
ENTER
ENTER
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM116
117
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
13
Press ENTER on EDIT MENU DVD-Video
Creation (Chapter Menu Select) display.
A confirmation message is displayed.
14
Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER.
The current broadcast picture appears and dubbing
starts. The progress is displayed on the screen and in
the front panel display on the recorder.
When copying is completed, a finalizing process follows.
This enables the disc to be played on a DVD video
player.
When the process is completed, a message Create
another DVD-Video now? appears (except when Auto
power off (see below) is set). If you select Ye s , you
can make one more DVD-R/RW of the same content. If
you select No, you can complete creating the DVD-
Video.
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job finishes.
1) During the job, press QUICK MENU button.
2) Press / buttons to select Auto power off.
3) Press ENTER button.
ENTER
ENTER
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM117
118
Notes
The number of titles that you can write on a DVD-R/RW
disc is limited (99 titles. Each title should have 99 chapters
or less). If you have a large number of titles or chapters,
you may not be able to write due to the limitation of the
DVD specifications. Also, even if the number of titles and
chapters is within the limit, you may not be able to write if
you have a large number of menu items.
Due to standard differences, the number of chapters and
their position may change slightly after DVD-Video
creation. (For chapters generated on a DVD-R/RW disc,
the same thumbnail for the Original chapter is displayed.)
Due to standard limitation, a DVD-R/RW disc may contain
unnecessary scenes after creation.
If you select items of various types of video outputs, aspect
ratios or other properties, or if you select an item recorded
with different settings, they may be divided into titles. (For
titles generated on a DVD-R/RW disc the same thumbnail
for the Original title is displayed).
Content based on a complicated PlayList or composed of
too many items may not be copied properly.
Copy-once permitted contents cannot be copied to a
DVD-R/RW disc, even if they are recorded onto the HDD
while DVD compatible mode is set to Main or SAP (
page 184).
Content recorded on a recorder other than this recorder
(including TOSHIBA products) cannot be copied to a DVD-
R/RW disc using High Speed Dubbing. First set DVD
compatible mode to Main or SAP and record them onto
the HDD. Then perform Rate conversion dubbing for
multiple parts ( page 108) to copy to the HDD.
When a content is recorded with manual rate 1.0 Mbps or
1.4 Mbps and is including a 16:9 picture shape scene, the
DVD creation of the content may fail. In this case, set Set
Aspect Ratio to 4:3 fixed on the menu (Option Settings).
Even if the title is recorded with DVD compatible mode set
to Main or SAP, using a recorder other than this may
cause failure when recording to a DVD-R/RW disc.
If the DVD-Video creating fails to be completed, most of the
discs cannot be used again.
If an error occurs while a DVD-Video is created, the error
code ERR-** (** indicates the error code) is shown in
the front panel display of the recorder. ( page 193) To
clear this display, press DISPLAY button.
There may be a difference between a specified thumbnail
of menu in the DVD-Video creation procedure and the one
on displayed in CONTENT MENU.
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued)
Editing
Selecting the items displayed on the menu
You can hide items on the menu if necessary.
To hide a disc name
Leave Disc Name blank. Display the on-screen
keyboard and press CLEAR button to delete letters,
then press button to save.
To hide a page number
Leave Disc Name blank. Follow the above
method.
To hide a disc name and show a page number
Enter one more space in Disc Name.
To hide a title/chapter name
On CONTENT MENU or a display of item selection,
select a title/chapter and display the
on-screen keyboard from Quick Menu. Erase all
characters of the name.
You can hide a time also using the same manner.
•“Chapter 0001 . . . on CONTENT MENU means
that the chapter is given no characters as its
name. Such a chapter does not show the name
on the menu.
A chapter menu shows the title name at the top
right corner. If you hide the title name, no
character appears in this area.
To hide a title/chapter name and show a time
Enter one more space and save it as the title/
chapter name.
Note
You cannot hide items other than above.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM118
119
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Using a favorite scene as a menu
You can select favorite scenes from the recorded
contents and use them as menus of DVD-Video
Created ( page 116) DVD-R/RW.
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
2) Press / / / to select a title which
contains a scene to use as menus.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select Save captured images.
5) Select a scene.
Locate a scene using the buttons such as PLAY,
SLOW, FRAME or PAUSE, etc.
6) Press / to select Loading and press
ENTER.
Notes
You cannot capture copy-protected contents.
The maximum number of pictures which can be saved
varies depending on the data size.
To name a captured image
Press / / / to select an image to name then
press QUICK MENU. Press / to select Enter
DVD-Video menu name then press ENTER.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Enter a name.
00:54:3000:00:00
B
Save captures images
00:00:00:03F
4:3
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
Select back ground picture
Loading
2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
HDD
EDIT
MENU
T001(00:00:23)
e.g.
00:54:3000:00:00
B
Save captures images
00:00:00:03F
4:3
Original
Aspect Ratio
Location
Select back ground picture
Loading
2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
HDD
EDIT
MENU
T001(00:00:23)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Enter DVD-Video menu name
Delete name
Delete all menus
Exit
To delete a captured image
Press / / / to select an image to delete then
press QUICK MENU. Press / to select Delete
menu then press ENTER. Follow the message to
operate.
To delete all captured images, select Delete all
menus.
Selecting color options on menus
Several options are available: a translucent
background for better legibility, character color and
cursor color selections.
1) At step 10 ( page 116), go to the next page
and select a captured image by / / / ,
then press .
The preview screen appears.
2) Press .
A color setting display appears.
3) Set each item by / / / , referring to the
guidance on the right half of the display, finally
press to exit.
The preview screen returns.
AAA
B
B
DVD-Video Creation (color setting)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Back ground color
On Off
White Black
0.5 0.7 0.9
Color
Permeation Ratio
12
Character
color
Selecting
color
Selected
color
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
1110
987654321
121110
987654321
121110
987654321
Set up the disc name, the
title name or page numer
on upper side of the screen,
OR the letter color of the
title name, the chapter
name and the time beside
the thumbnail.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM119
120
Canceling selection of an item
1) Press / / / to select an item then press
QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select Cancel selected title (or
Clear all selected items for canceling
selection of all items at a time).
3) Press ENTER.
The selected item disappears.
Changing the location of an item
Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the
item, then repeat steps 3 to 5 to re-insert the item in a
desired location ( page 113, 114).
Confirming the content in the lower area
Select an item and press QUICK MENU. Then press
/ to select Preview and press ENTER.
Notes
Each time an item is selected, its name appears at the
bottom of the screen.
You can also confirm the content by selecting Title
information from Quick Menu.
Canceling dubbing process
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press / to select Stop creating DVD video,
then press ENTER.
Notes
If you cancel creating DVD-Video on a DVD-R disc, the
disc will become unusable in most cases.
Canceling is not always possible.
AAA
BB
DVD-Video Create
(Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Original
Next
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
Creating Media: DVD
Capacity
Quick Menu
Cancel selected title
Preview
Preview all selected items
Title information
Clear all selected items
Auto power off
Exit
To improve legibility of characters on menus
Press / / / to set Back ground color to
On. Then select Color (White or Black)
according to the menus tone, and set Permeation
Ratio, which sets the how translucent the selected
Back ground color is. The higher the ratio, the Back
ground color will be more translucent but the lower
legibility of characters.
To change the character color
Press / / / to select from 12 colors. When
you select White back ground color, dark color
should be a better choice.
To change the cursor color
Selecting Color is a color for the moving cursor.
Selected Color is one for the press of ENTER
button.
To preview your selections
Press O button to return to the preview screen. If
you correct your selections, repeat steps 2) and 3)
( page 119).
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued)
Editing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM120
121
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
If a message appears while selecting a part
You may receive a message, such as Selection of
Writing Test in the next option setting is recommended
to check whether Aspect Ratio coexists. If a copy-
prohibited content is included, or if the aspect ratio is
changed meanwhile, cancel the selection. If you are
not sure, select Writing Test (Parts Test or All Test).
Note
Depending on selection or condition of items, copying may
result in failure. If a message appears, be sure to, prior to
step 7, press QUICK MENU button. Then press /
buttons to select Cancel selected title, and press ENTER
button. If you do not do this and continue the copying
process, an error may occur and the disc will be rendered
useless.
Playing a created DVD-Video
You can play the DVD-R/RW in the same manner as
you would play a DVD video disc.
See page 66.
If you want to correct the contents of a DVD-RW
after the DVD-Video creation procedure
Cancel the finalization of the DVD-RW ( page 125).
It is possible only on DVD-RW recorded on this
recorder.
After canceling, you can delete titles. However, you
cannot re-use the whole disc, since only the last title
can restore the disc space.
If you want to delete all contents of a DVD-RW
after the DVD-Video creation procedure
Load the DVD-RW into the recorder and initialize it,
then execute the procedure of DVD-Video creation
( page 112).
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM121
122
DVD-Video finalizing process
The recorder processes recorded data in a DVD-R/RW disc so that it can be played on other compatible
devices.
Important
You cannot rewrite data onto a disc after you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process. However, the disabled rewritability of
a DVD-RW disc can be restored by canceling the process of the disc ( page 125). On DVD-R discs, canceling of the DVD-
Video finalizing process is not available.
Canceling of the DVD-Video finalizing process is available only on DVD-RW recorded or copied contents on this recorder.
Preparation
Press DVD button to select the DVD mode.
Load a DVD-R/RW disc you want to execute the finalizing process.
Editing
DVD-RW
DVD-R
1Press EDIT MENU.
EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
2Press / to select DVD-Video Finalizing.
3Press ENTER.
A display of option settings appears.
EDIT MENU
ENTER
ENTER
AAA
BB
DVD-Video Finalize(Option Settings)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
NextReturn
Menu Create Title+Chapter Title Chapter None
Writing Test None Parts Test All Test
Set Aspect Ratio Original 4:3 fixed 16:9 fixed
Start Play
Menu
Title 1
After play one title
After play final title
Menu
Next Title
Menu
Title 1
Stop
Main Menu
Source
Edit Functions
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
Del Selected Items
DVD-Video Finalizing
Playlist Editing
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
DVD-Video Finalizing
Used to create compatibility between
the recorded DVD-R/-RW and
DVD Players. Also used for setting up
menu picture, etc.
Title
Finalize
Menu
Title Title
321 3
2
1
1 2
321 3
2
1
1 2
DVD-R
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 06.3.20, 4:16 PM122
123
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4Press / / / to select.
As you select each item, its function is explained.
When Menu Create is set to None:
Start play and After play one title are automatically
omitted.
5Press / to select Next, then press
ENTER.
Information on data to be processed appears.
If you press button to select Edit Name then press
ENTER button, a keyboard appears so that you can
enter a title name.
When Menu Create is set to None:
Select Writing at the right bottom by / / /
buttons and press ENTER button. Skip to step 10.
6Press to select Next, then press ENTER.
When Menu Create is set to Title+Chapter or Title, a
display of title menu selection appears.
To view your captured images ( page 119), go to the
next page.
If you press button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press O button.
While displaying a preview screen of your captured
image, you can access the other menu to correct color
( page 119) by pressing button.
(Continued)
ENTER
ENTER
ENTERENTER
A
B
DVD-Video Finalize (Title Menu Select)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Deep Blue Olive Sepia Light Blue
DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
1/ 2
AAA
BB
DVD-Video Finalize(Disc Information)
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
NextReturn
Disc name
11
1 hour 24 min.
Edit Name
Total title number
Total time
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 06.3.20, 4:16 PM123
124
Editing
DVD-Video finalizing process (Continued)
7Press / / / to select the title menu, then
press ENTER.
A display of chapter menu selection appears if Menu
Create is set to Tltle+Chapter or Chapter at step 3.
8Press / / / to select the chapter menu.
A selected menu is applied to all chapters. You cannot
allocate a menu to each chapter.
If you press button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press O button.
If you press button during preview, to select Return
then press ENTER button, you can go to the preview of
the selected title menu. To return to the preview of
chapter menu, press / / / buttons to select a
number next to Chapter Menu then press ENTER
button.
9Press ENTER on EDIT MENU DVD-Video
Finalize (Chapter Menu Select) display, and
select Yes by / , then press ENTER.
A message appears to ask you if you want the power to
turn off automatically or not when the process is
completed.
10
Press / to select Yes or No then press
ENTER.
A message disappears and the finalize process starts.
The progress is displayed on the screen and in the front
panel display on the recorder.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 06.3.20, 4:16 PM124
125
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
Notes
DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder may not be
recognized on other devices unless you execute DVD-
Video finalizing process to them.
You can record onto a DVD-R disc additionally to the limit
of the disc capacity, unless you execute the DVD-Video
finalizing process to it. Deleting of recorded titles is also
possible, however, the disc space cannot be restored.
You can record additional content onto a DVD-RW disc
additionally to the limit of the disc capacity unless you
execute the DVD-Video finalizing process to it. Deleting of
recorded titles is also possible, however, the disc space
can be restored only by the volume of the title last
recorded.
On DVD-RW discs, it is possible to cancel the DVD-Video
finalizing process or to initialize for a new use.
If a start time of a programmed recording comes during a
finalizing process, the recording is made onto the HDD.
However, while making a menu, the recording is not
executed. Also, when Relay recording is set to Off the
recording will not start.
To cancel the finalize process
DVD-RW
You can cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed to a DVD-RW disc so that the disc can be
recordable again.
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
A quick menu appears.
2) Press / to select Disc management then
press ENTER.
3) Press / to select Cancel finalization then
press ENTER.
4) Read the message, and press / to select
Yes, then press ENTER.
The process starts.
Notes
While the recorder is ready to start a programmed
recording, you cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing
process.
You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed on a DVD-RW disc recorded on other device.
You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed on a DVD-RW disc if the disc is protected.
Canceling the DVD-Video finalizing process may shift the
thumbnails of titles/chapters.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 06.3.20, 4:16 PM125
126
Changing the picture on CONTENT MENU
You can register your favorite scene as a thumbnail displayed on CONTENT MENU.
On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not available.
1Press CONTENT MENU, then press / / /
to select a title.
2Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
3Press / to select Create thumbnail
(or Create CHP thumbnail if selected a
chapter at step 1), then press ENTER.
CONTENT MENU Create Thumbnail appears.
Start
QUICK MENU
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
Original
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
HDD :
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thumbnail
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter function
Edit function
Special playback mode
Save captured images
Disc information
Display changeover
Specific page jump
Title delete
Exit
ENTER
00:54:30
2006/03/24 11:00pm Ch:6
00:00:00
HDD
(0:29:50)
B
00:00:00:03F
Original
Location
Create Thumbnail
Select desired thumbnail image via
remote. To set, press enter.
CONTENT
MENU
Title:002 Chapter:0001
e.g.
Editing
Other editing functions
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 06.3.20, 4:16 PM126
127
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
4Press PLAY to start playback.
Locate a scene you want to capture as a thumbnail.
You can use the following buttons.
PICTURE SEARCH, FRAME, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE, etc.
5At the point where you want to capture a
thumbnail image, press PAUSE.
6Press ENTER.
CONTENT MENU returns. The selected scene is
displayed as a thumbnail.
PLAY
PAUSE
ENTER
00:29:50
2006/03/24 11:00pm Ch:6
00:00:00
HDD
(0:29:50)
B
00:06:25:23F
Original
Location
Create Thumbnail
Select desired thumbnail image via
remote. To set, press enter.
CONTENT
MENU
Title:002 Chapter:0001
e.g.
Original
HDD :
2006/03/24 07:00
am TV:4
Title List Page
MENU
CONTENT
1/ 2
(0:53:45)
Original
2006/04/07 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
2006/04/08 09:00
pm TV:10
(
0:51:28
)
Original
2006/03/29 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
2006/04/07 11:00
pm TV:4
(
0:30:08
)
HDD
Original
2006/03/24 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
e.g.
Notes
There may be a small difference between a thumbnail made on the Create Thumbnail display and that displayed in
CONTENT MENU. Operation with PICTURE SEARCH button may extend the difference.
You cannot create thumbnails of chapters in a title that contains a still picture.
If you create a chapter thumbnail, and then shift the chapter mark ( page 90) or record or edit the disc on other devices,
the chapter thumbnail may return to the top of the chapter.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 06.3.23, 8:54 AM127
128
Combining two titles (Original) into one
Use this feature to combine two titles into one. The second title is deleted as the second title is added to the end of
the first title.
1Press HDD or DVD to select a disc that
contains titles or chapters you want to merge.
2Press EDIT MENU.
EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
3Press / to select Combine ORG Title,
then press ENTER.
EDIT MENU Combine ORG Title appears.
4Press / to select the first title to merge.
Press PICTURE SEARCH button to move to the
previous or next page.
5Press ENTER.
The cursor appears in the lower area of the screen (the
title to merge to).
Cursor
EDIT MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
A
B
Combine ORG Title
Title
Object :HDD
Original
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
For so rce only 2 titles (original)
AAA
BB
Object :HDD
Start combining
Title:
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can be selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
Start
Editing
Other editing functions (Continued)
HDD
DVD-RAM
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 06.3.20, 4:16 PM128
129
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Library Network Navi Function setup Others
6Press / to select the location to put the
part and press ENTER.
It is fixed at the left side at the beginning. Press ENTER
button. The selected part moved into the location of the
cursor.
7Perform steps 4 to 6 and select the second
title.
You cannot select the same title.
To cancel the registered part:
1) Select the part that you want to cancel, and press QUICK
MENU button to display the Quick Menu.
2) Press / buttons to select Cancel selected title (or Clear
all selected items for cancelling the selection of multiple items
at a time).
3) Press ENTER button.
8Press / to select Start combining and
press ENTER, then select Yes and press
ENTER.
The combining process starts.
Notes
You cannot stop the combining process after it has started.
You cannot combine titles if their length will exceed 9 hours.
You cannot combine a protected title or a title containing still pictures.
The title name of the first title is given to the title after combining.
The second title is combined into the first title, maintaining the chapter divisions and chapter names.
Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.
ENTER
ENTER
A
B
Combine ORG Title
Title
Object :HDD
Original
Start combining
Title:
HDD
EDIT
MENU
e.g.
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can be selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 06.3.20, 4:16 PM129
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 06.3.20, 4:16 PM130
Library
To facilitate your collecting.
Using Library data
Searching for a desired title
Viewing Library data
Checking remaining space
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM131
132
Library
Using Library data
The recorder has a Library Management database which memorizes various properties of recordings
made on this recorder, including date, media, title, genre, etc. Using this database, you can search for
desired or available discs.
You can utilize Library data as follows.
To search for a DVD-RAM disc that contains a desired title.
To check or change information of a title or disc.
To check the remaining space of a DVD-RAM disc.
Basic operation of the Library system
Notes
To cancel this procedure, press LIBRARY button.
The Library system does not support DVD-R/RW discs.
Selecting a title on LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles), and pressing ENTER button begins playback of the title if
the disc containing the title is loaded.
For proper function of the Library system, use DVD-RAM discs that shows a statement on its package such as This disc can
copy images that permit copying once. If you use a DVD-RAM disc without such a statement, and then operate it on other
device, the library data of the disc may not function properly.
LIBRARY MENU may not display all characters of a registered name of a disc.
1Press LIBRARY.
LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles) appears.
2Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
3Press / to select an item, then press
ENTER.
For details on each item, see from the next page.
LIBRARY
QUICK MENU
ENTER
HDD
DVD-RAM
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2006/03/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11 00
5
2006/03/26
HDD
2006/03/25 11:00pm ...
4
2006/03/25
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2006/03/24
HDD
2006/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2006/03/23
HDD
2006/03/19 11 00
2
2006/03/19
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
S
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2006/03/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2004/ 6/20
HDD
2006/03/25 11:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/19
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/18
HDD
2006/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/17
HDD
2006/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2004/ 6/11
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
T
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm
L2
2006/03/14
L1
t
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
e.g.
Quick Menu
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc no.
Title information
Arrange
Narrowing
Jump
Disc information
Library management
Exit
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM132
133
Editing Library
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Function setup Others
Searching for a desired title
From the LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles), you can select a title by using / buttons. If you
change the listing order or sort the titles, search may be easier.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Changing the listing order
Arrange
1) From Quick Menu, select Arrange by /
then press ENTER.
The submenu appears.
2) Press / to select the listing order, then press
ENTER.
Titles are arranged in selected order.
Note
If you repeat the selection of different types of the listing
order, the old one precedes the new one. For example,
when you select Arrange by genre then Arrange by disc
no., the order of genre is produced in the order of disc
number.
Searching
Narrowing
1) From the Quick Menu, select Narrowing by
/ then press ENTER.
The sub menu appears.
2) Press / to select a narrowing condition, then
press ENTER.
Sort by genre
The submenu appears.
Press / buttons to select a genre, then press
ENTER button.
Titles within the selected genre are sorted.
Sort by disc(DVD)
An input window appears.
Follow steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press / to select a location, then press
ADJUST or / to enter the disc number.
2) Press ENTER.
Titles in the specified disc are sorted. For
example, if you enter 001-, titles in discs 001,
001A and 001B are listed.
Sort by disc(HDD)
Titles in the HDD are sorted.
Sort by day
The submenu appears.
Press / buttons to select the day, then press
ENTER button.
Titles recorded on the selected day are listed.
Notes
Press O button to go back to the display for the previous
narrowing condition.
If you want to display all titles, press QUICK MENU
button, then press / buttons to select Cancel
narrowings and press ENTER button.
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2004/06/20 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2004/ 6/20
HDD
2004/06/19 11:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/19
HDD
2004/06/18 07:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/18
HDD
2004/06/17 09:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/17
HDD
2006/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2004/ 6/11
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Quick Menu
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc no.
Title information
Arrange
Narrowing
Jump
Disc information
Library management
Exit
Arrange by title name
Arrange by disc no.
Arrange by genre
Arrange by week
Arrange by date
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2006/06/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
5
2006/03/26
HDD
2006/03/25 11:00pm ...
4
2006/03/25
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2006/03/24
HDD
2004/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2006/03/23
HDD
2004/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2006/03/17
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
L1
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Sort by disc(DVD)
Disc No. 00 1
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2004/06/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2004/ 6/20
HDD
2004/06/25 11:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/19
HDD
2004/06/24 07:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/18
HDD
2006/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/17
HDD
2006/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2004/ 6/11
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
e.g.
Quick Menu
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc no.
Title information
Arrange
Narrowing
Jump
Disc information
Library management
Exit
Sort by genre
Sort by disc(DVD)
Sort by disc(HDD)
Sort by day
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM133
134
Searching for a desired title (Continued)
Library
Jumping
Jump
1) From the Quick Menu, select Jump by /
then press ENTER.
The submenu appears.
2) Press / to select the jump method, then
press ENTER.
Appoint character
An input window appears.
Perform steps 1) to 3) below.
1) Put the cursor on the input area and press
ENTER.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
2) Enter the first characters (up to 3 characters) of
the title you are looking for.
3) Press to select Jump and press ENTER.
The title that starts with the specified characters is
selected.
Note
The input window of Specific Character Jump can be
shifted by pressing / buttons.
Appoint disc no.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Perform steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press / to select the position to enter and
press ADJUST or / to enter the disc number.
Input 3 digits, and, if necessary A or B of disc. If
you input “–”, you can leave the digit and the lower
unspecified to search. For example, when 1 0 –”
is input, titles of disc number such as 100, 100A,
102 are searched, and a title list starting from the
first found one appears. It is recommended that you
execute Arrange by disc no. beforehand.
2) Press ENTER.
The titles of the selected number disc are
displayed.
Specific page
An input window appears.
Perform steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press / or ADJUST to enter the page
number.
2) Press ENTER.
The selected page is displayed.
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2006/03/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2006/03/26
HDD
2006/03/25 11:00pm ...
4
2006/03/25
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2006/03/24
HDD
2004/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2006/03/23
HDD
2004/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2006/03/17
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Specific Disc No. Jump
Disc No. 00 1
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2006/06/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2006/03/26
HDD
2006/03/25 11:00pm ...
4
2006/03/25
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2006/03/24
HDD
2004/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2006/03/23
HDD
2004/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2006/03/17
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Specific Page Jump
Page Number
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2004/06/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2004/ 6/20
HDD
2004/06/25 11:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/19
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/18
HDD
2006/03/23 09:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/17
HDD
2006/03/19 11:00pm ...
2
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2004/ 6/11
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Quick Menu
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc no.
Title information
Arrange
Narrowing
Jump
Disc information
Library management
Exit
Appoint character
Appoint disc no.
Specific page
Title Summary
(All Titles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2006/03/26 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2006/03/26
HDD
2006/03/25 11:00pm ...
4
2006/03/25
HDD
2006/03/24 07:00pm ...
3
2006/03/24
HDD
2004/06/17 09:00pm ...
3
2006/03/17
HDD
2004/06/13 11:00pm ...
2
2006/03/13
HDD
2006/03/19 09:00pm ...
4
2006/03/19
HDD
2006/03/17 09:00pm ...2006/03/17
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Specific Character Jump
Character String: Jump
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM134
135
Editing Library
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Function setup Others
Viewing Library data
This section explains how to check and maintain the Library data.
HDD
DVD-RAM
Library
Viewing title information
Title information
1) From Quick Menu, select Title information by
/ then press ENTER.
You can view information about the selected title.
You can do the following operations with Quick Menu.
(Press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu.
Press / buttons to select an item and press
ENTER.)
Edit title name:
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Following the procedure on page 36, enter a new
name for the title.
Edit chapter name:
(Press PICTURE SEARCH ( /) button to display
the chapter that you want to put a name for, and select
the chapter.)
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Following the procedure on page 36, enter a new
name for the chapter.
Del chapter name:
(Press PICTURE SEARCH ( /) button to display
the chapter that you want to put a name for, and select
the chapter.)
Record date & time:
The cursor moves to the date so that you can correct
it.
Lock
Set the protection for the currently selected title.
The protection icon appears.
Genre:
The submenu appears.
Press / buttons to select a genre, then press
ENTER button.
A name of the selected genre and the icon appear.
Note
When you change settings of a DVD-RAM disc, load
the DVD-RAM disc.
Viewing disc information
Disc information
1) From Quick Menu, select Disc information by
/ then press ENTER.
You can view information about the loaded disc.
To change the number or name of the DVD-RAM
disc:
1) Press / to select Edit Disc Number or
Edit Disc Name, then press ENTER button.
2) Following the procedure on page 36, enter
a new name for the disc.
To change the disc number, press ADJUST
button.
Title information
MENU
CONTENT
(2:06:32)
3
3/26(Su) 10:00 pm
2006/03/26 10:00pm TV:3
2006
CH
Title : 006
(0:04:15)
Media : Documentary/Culture(General)
Quality :
Rate :
Audio :
0001
Chapter :
Original
XP
Mode :
LP
2. 2
D/ M1
Off
DVD Mode :
HDD
e.g.
Title information
MENU
CONTENT
(2:06:32)
3
3/26(Su) 10:00 pm
2004/07/11 10:00pm TV:3
2006
CH
Title : 006
(0:04:15)
Media : Documentary/Culture(General)
Mode :
Rate :
Audio :
0001
Chapter :
Original
LP
2. 2
Mode :
LP
D/ M1
Off
DVD Mode :
HDD
e.g.
Quick Menu
Edit title name
Edit chapter name
Del chapter name
Record date & time
Lock
Genre
Exit
Disc information
MENU
CONTENT
Disc Type Record Time (h:m)
Remain Time (h:m)
Edit Disc Number
Edit Disc Name
DVD-RAM
VR mode
4
1:51
0:10
0:05
0:10
0:22
0:07
0:15
D/M1:
L-PCM
:
D/M1:
D/M1:
D/M2:
D/M1:
SP
MN
SP
LP
MN
MN
4.6Mbps /
6.6Mbps /
4.6Mbps /
2.2Mbps /
6.0Mbps /
3.2Mbps /
(
Current)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
0
Normal
Lock Off
001
Writing Mode
Original Titles
Playlist Titles
Disc Status
Disc Lock
Finalize
Video Create
Possible
Increment Rec
e.g.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM135
136
Viewing Library data (Continued)
Library
Maintenance of Library data
The recorder usually controls the Library database
system automatically. However, in the following cases,
you must maintain and create data manually.
When you want to add information about a title, (for
example when you use a DVD-RAM disc recorded
on another device, etc.), to the Library system of the
recorder.
Registering a disc manually ( page 136).
When the Library database memory is full. (Up to
3000 entries can be registered. When you reach this
limit, a message will appear and further additions to the
Library database will be rejected. Erase unnecessary
data to make space.)
Erasing unnecessary data ( page 137).
When you want to rearrange the whole Library
information from the beginning.
Deleting all the Library information only ( page
137).
When you save the Library data in another DVD-
RAM disc.
Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc (
page 138).
When you import saved Library data back into the
recorder.
Re-installing the backup data ( page 138).
Note
Save your Library data on a DVD-RAM disc. Importing
Library data replaces all current database information in
the recorder, including any data added after you saved the
data onto a DVD-RAM disc.
Registering a disc manually
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc that contains information
you want to add.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select Library management,
then press ENTER.
A submenu appears.
5) Press / to select Add disc, then press
ENTER.
6) Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select No.
All title information is registered.
Notes
To use title information in a DVD-RAM disc recorded on
another device, as the Library data of the recorder, be sure
to follow the procedure of Registering a disc manually to
add saved data to the Library system. This information
cannot be added automatically.
If you record content on a DVD-RAM disc on the recorder
and edit the content on the other device, Library data of the
disc may be lost or the disc may not function properly.
Unless a DVD-RAM disc is registered to the recorder,
information of current or future titles recorded on the disc,
will not registered.
By registering a disc manually, several discs in same
number consequently may be registered. In this case, the
remaining time is displayed per disc or page. Execution of
Edit Disc Number ( page 135) is recommended.
Title Summary
(All tTitles)
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
HDD
2004/06/20 07:00pm ...7:00 pm
11:00 pm
7:00 pm
9:00 pm
11:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
9:00 pm
10:27 pm
5
2004/ 6/20
HDD
2004/06/19 11:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/19
HDD
2004/06/18 07:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/18
HDD
2004/06/17 09:00pm ...
3
2004/ 6/17
HDD
2004/06/13 11:00pm ...
2
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2004/06/13 09:00pm ...
4
2004/ 6/13
HDD
2004/06/11 09:00pm ...2004/ 6/11
HDD
2006/03/15 09:00pm ...
L1
2006/03/15
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
Su
Su
Fr
We
Tu
HDD
2006/03/15 10:27pm ...
L2
2006/03/14
L1
etc
...
e.g.
2:49 pm
5/30 (Tu)
No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name
Quick Menu
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc no.
Title information
Arrange
Narrowing
Jump
Disc information
Library management
Exit
Add disc
Del title information
Del title information by disc
Delete all DVD-RAM information
Delete all library information
Delete disc no. from library
Create backup
Re-inst all backup
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM136
137
Editing Library
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Function setup Others
Erasing unnecessary data
When the Library database is full (3000 entries).
Select Del title information.
1) Press LIBRARY.
2) Press / to select a title.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select Library management
then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select Del title information, then
press ENTER.
6) Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER.
Library data of the title selected in step 2) is
erased.
To cancel, select No.
To delete information of all titles in the specified data
Select Del title information by disc.
1) Press LIBRARY.
2) Press / to select a title.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select Library management
then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select Del title information by
disc, then press ENTER.
6) Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER.
Library data of all titles in the disc you selected in
step 2) is erased.
To cancel, select No.
Deleting all the Library information only
Use this feature when you want to rearrange the whole
Library information from the beginning.
1) Press LIBRARY.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / to select Library management and
press ENTER.
4) Press / to select Delete All DVD-RAM
information or Delete all library information.
Delete all DVD-RAM information:
Deletes all Library information from a DVD-RAM
disc, leaving the Library information on the HDD.
Delete all library information:
Deletes all Library information from the HDD and a
DVD-RAM disc.
5) Press ENTER.
6) Press / to select Yes and press ENTER.
Forced deletion of disc numbers
A number of an inactive disc can be deleted from the
Library Management, so that it can be assigned to a
new disc.
1) Press LIBRARY.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / to select Library management,
then press ENTER.
4) Press / to select Del disc no. from Library,
then press ENTER.
5) Press ADJUST to select a number to delete,
then press ENTER.
Note
Deleting a disc number also deletes data of all titles in the
disc.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM137
138
Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc to save the Library data.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select Library management,
then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select Create backup, then
press ENTER.
6) Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select No.
Re-installing the backup data
1) Load the DVD-RAM disc containing the Library
database.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select Library management,
then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select Re-inst all backup, then
press ENTER.
6) Press / to select Yes, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select No.
Note
Do not use a DVD-RAM disc which contains Library
Management data registered to another recorder for
backup data storage. Library Management format may vary
depending on the model. Adding data of a new format onto
the saved disc may prevent the data of the older format
from being re-installed.
Viewing Library data (Continued)
Library
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM138
139
Editing Library
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Function setup Others
Viewing a number and space of a disc
DVD all disc no.
1) From the Quick Menu, select DVD all disc no.
by / then press ENTER.
You can view numbers, names and estimated
remaining spaces about all the registered discs.
To recheck the remaining space for a different User
record quality setting
1) Press QUICK MENU.
Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select User record quality then
press ENTER.
3) Press ADJUST and select the setting ( page
183).
4) Press ENTER.
Note
It is recommended that beforehand you select a desired
title or disc by arrange selection then execute DVD
space remaining, because the recorder lists the remaining
space from the specified disc or the one which contains the
specified title.
Checking remaining space
You can check the remaining space of each disc prior to recording.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Viewing remaining space
DVD space remaining
1) From the Quick Menu, select DVD space
remaining by / then press ENTER.
You can view the recording titles and the estimated
space remaining per disc.
Note
You can rearrange the list by selecting Arrange,
Narrowing or Jump from Quick Menu.
DVD All disc No. Summary
MENU
LIBRARY
1/ 2
e.g.
No.
Estimated
Disc Name
001
20min.Spanish Conversation vol.1
002
10min.Spanish Conversation vol.2
003
5min.Movie
AV quality calculation can be changed from Quick Menu.
Manual 6.6 L-PCMCurrent defaul.
004
2min.Live Concert
2:49 pm
6/22 (Tu)
HDD DVD
Custom setting
Setting
Total recording time: approx. 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
Manual
6.6
Mode
Rate
Audio quality
Manual1
2
3
4
5
Setting 1
L-PCM
D/M1
SP
LP
Manual
Manual
6.6
4.6
2.2
6.0
3.2
SP
4.6
D/M1
L-PCM
D/M1
D/M2
D/M1
User record quality
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM139
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM140
Network Navi
Operate the recorder with a PC.
What is Network Navi?
Preparation for Network Navi
1: Connection to a PC
2: Recorders setup
- Network Setting
3: Setting up the PC
4: Starting Network Navi
5: Network Navi settings
Network Navi features
Displaying thumbnails
(Title List)
Operating with the remote
control screen
Using Library information
(Library)
Setting for custom menu addition
(Custom Menu Editor)
Net Dubbing
Net Monitor
Setting a timer recording
using email
If you are having a difficulty
with Network Navi features...
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM141
142
Network Navi
What is Network Navi?
Network Navi can operate and set the recorder using a web screen.
You need a PC that can be connected to the recorder with a Local Area Network (LAN).
If you have an always-on internet connection, you can use email to remotely set a timer recording.
Network Navi
Main features of Network Navi
Editing titles using a PC
As in the CONTENT MENU of the recorder, this
feature displays a list of content that were recorded on
the internal HDD and DVD-RAM/R/RW. You can
change general title information such as title names,
chapter names and genres. (However, the information
for a DVD-R/RW recorded by another device cannot
be displayed or changed. The information on a
finalized DVD-R/RW can be displayed but cannot be
changed.)
Checking the library using a PC
This feature displays and sorts the recorders Library
information. It searches for a DVD-RAM which has
empty space or desired disc by using stored
information for each title such as disc number,
recorded time and date, title name, and genre.
Saving the DVD-Video menu background from a
PC
This feature allows you to save your favorite image
from a PC to the recorder and use it as the menu
background.
Setting a timer recording using email
This feature allows you to remotely set a timer
recording using email.
Operating the recorder from a PC
This feature allows operation of the recorder from a
PC.
Streaming content to the PC
(Net Monitor)
Dubbing content to another
Network Navi recorder on the network (Net Dubbing)
Flow of Network Navi setting
e.g.: Using Network Navi and a PC with an always-on
internet connection (A connection of Network Navi to a
PC with an always-on internet connection is
recommended.)
Please read the information on operation,
restrictions, and the disclaimer. ( page 143 -
144)
You will need to understand the content and agree to
the terms.
You understood the content and agreed to the terms!
Setting up the Network Navi system.
Connection to a PC ( page 145 - 146)
Recorders setup - Network Setting ( page 147 -
149)
Starting Network Navi ( page 152)
Network Navi settings ( page 153)
Use Network Navi ! ( page 154 - )
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other
materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM142
143
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Operating environment
The recorder complies with the 802.3 standard of IEEE
(Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers). The
following environment is required to use the Network
Navi features. Please check these conditions before
connecting to a PC.
PC
OS: Windows® 2000/XP
Mac OS X (10.4)
Color monitor: 16-bit color or greater, 800 x 600
resolution or greater
Required device: LAN port (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)
WWW browser
For Windows® : Internet Explorer 6.0
For Mac OS : Safari 2.0
Operation cannot be guaranteed for versions beyond
the above.
The installation of Java VM Ver. 1.5 (for Mac OS X:
1.4.2) is required to use Network Navi features.
To obtain the latest Java VM, check the website of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. at http://www.sun.com/ (as of
May 2005).
Network connection environment
Broadband always-on connection
Note
Operating environment may change without advance
notice. In addition, all operations are not guaranteed.
Terminology and trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and the Internet Explorer logo are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Windows® 2000...Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
operating system Service Pack3 (SP3)
Windows® XP...Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system
The official name of Windows is Microsoft Windows
Operating System.
Macintosh, Mac, and Safari are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
The product names in this document may be used as
trademarks or registered trademarks by each company.
Java and all Java-based marks are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and
other countries.
(Continued)
Restrictions and disclaimers
Before using Network Navi, please read and understand
the important information in Operating environment and
Restrictions and Disclaimers.
Restrictions and Disclaimers
Network Navi features can only be used when the recorder
is in an operational state (excluding the confirmation
feature of timer recording setting via email while in standby
mode). Network Navi features cannot be used to turn on
the power for the recorder (except when timer recording
feature and Auto Power OFF are set).
Through connection to a PC, Network Navi features can be
used to edit text information such as title names, chapter
names, and program descriptions; change various settings;
display thumbnails; and load background data contained in
the DVD-Video menu. Obtaining, changing, and/or adding
other information to content cannot be done.
Network Navi features, which are used through a
connected PC, are not for video replay and image and
audio data loading, editing, writing, and file transfer.
The included LAN cable (crossover cable) can be used to
directly connect the recorder to a PC. For connection to a
hub or router, use a separate, commercially available LAN
cable (straight cable).
Operating Environment
1. OS (operating system): Windows® 2000/XP or Mac
OS X (10.4).
2. DOS/V compatible PC or Macintosh computer (LAN
connector required).
3. Internet browser: Internet Explorer (Windows®) or
Safari (Mac OS).
All of the following environmental conditions are
required for using Timer recording setting using email.
4. Always-on broadband internet connection.
5. Email account that can send and receive mail from
the installation location (using a POP server and
SMTP server).
6. Broadband router with hub (DHCP feature base is
recommended).
The communication features of this recorder comply
with the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE) 802.3.
Certain factors including, without limitation, the
available bandwidth and quality of your internet
connection, and the connection between the recorder
and your PC, may cause a delay and/or error in the
displaying of content on your PC. Such delays and/or
errors, if any, may be more pronounced when the
recorder is connected via a wireless LAN.
Some Network Navi features may not be usable due to
certain settings and/or restrictions set by the Internet
service provider (ISP) supplying your broadband
Internet connection.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM143
144
Network Navi
What is Network Navi? (Continued)
Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges and email charges are
your responsibility.
If the broadband internet connection device (such as a
Cable Modem or ADSL modem) specified by your ISP
does not have a 10Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port,
you will not be able to make a connection to the
recorder.
An ADSL modem is required to use ADSL service and
a cable modem is required to use cable modem
service. Depending on the access method of and
subscriber agreement with your ISP, you may not be
able to use the Network Navi features contained in this
recorder or you may be limited to the number of
devices you can connect at the same time.
The use of a Router may not be allowed or its usage
may be limited depending on the policies and
restrictions of your ISP. For details, contact your SP
directly.
For Timer recording setting using email or "Timer
recording setting by cell phone email," a separate email
account is required that is connectable from your
home, and compatible with POP3 or APOP. An email
account that is not accessible from home, such as a
cell phone email address, cannot be used in
connection with this recorder and the aforementioned
Network Navi features.
An always-on broadband internet connection is
necessary for the recorder to access the ISP's mail
server via the same network. It is not necessary for a
connected PC to be powered on for the recorder to be
able to connect to the mail server.
In some cases, a connected PC may be set to
automatically receive email from a mail server and
delete such email on the server at the time of its
receipt, in which case, it is possible that a timer
recording set via email may be deleted before the
recorder receives it. In such case, it is recommended
that you make the appropriate setting changes so that
a copy of each incoming email remains on the server.
To set a timer recording by email using a cellphone,
use internet email. Email systems between cellphones,
such as text messaging services, cannot be used to set
a timer recording on the recorder.
A webmail or web portal (incompatible with POP3)
cannot be used to set a timer recording by email.
Use a category 5, 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX LAN cable
when connecting to a PC with a broadband always-on
internet connection. Use the included crossover cable
when connecting the recorder directly to a PC.
Depending on the security software installed on a
connected PC and the settings of such software,
certain features contained in this recorder may not be
usable.
Note: Toshiba is not responsible for any malfunction of
the recorder and/or the Network Navi features due to
communication errors/malfunctions associated with your
broadband internet connection and/or your PC, or other
connected equipment. In the event that any content
intended to be recorded fails to be recorded and/or any
content intended to be edited fails to be edited due to
any of the aforementioned reasons, please contact your
ISP and/or PC manufacturer.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM144
145
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
1: Connection to a PC
A PC with a LAN connection is required.
The main method for PC connection is either a direct connection or through a constant and continuous (always-on)
internet connection. Usable features differ depending on the connection method.
The features of Network Navi can be utilized fully only if the recorder is connected using a PC with an always-on
internet connection and router.
Direct connection to a PC
The following can be done from the PC
Editing the title information (Title Thumbnail
List)
Checking the Library (Library)
Setting the theme for menu screen (DVD-Video
Tool)
Operating the recorder (Virtual Remote Control)
Streaming content to the PC (Net Monitor)
The following settings are required.
Connecting to the PC ( page 146)
Setting up the Network Setting ( page 147)
Setting up the PC ( page 151)
Starting Network Navi ( page 152)
Always-on internet connection with a PC
Phone line
The following can be done from the PC
Editing the title information (Title Thumbnail
List)
Checking the Library (Library)
Setting the theme for menu screen (DVD-Video
Tool)
Operating the recorder (Virtual Remote Control)
Streaming content to the PC (Net Monitor)
The following settings are required.
Connecting to the PC ( page 146)
Setting up the Network Setting ( page 147)
Starting Network Navi ( page 152)
Network Navi Settings ( page 153)
Preparation for Network Navi
Follow the procedures 1 to 4 to use Network Navi.
(Continued)
Network Navi
Broadband modem
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM145
146
Network Navi
LAN(10/100)
Regarding the cable used:
When connecting directly to this
recorder, use the included LAN
crossover cable.
When connecting using a router,
use a commercially available LAN
straight cable (category 5/CAT5).
While pressing down
Direct connection to a PC
Crossover cable
To LAN (Ether) port
Connecting to a PC using a router (e.g. ADSL)
To LAN (Ether) port
Straight cable
ADSL modem
(Router, internal type)
Phone line Phone line
To LAN (Ether) port
To LAN (Ether) port
To LAN (Ether) port
Router ADSL modem
Back view of the recorder
To LAN(10/100) port
Caution
When plugging or unplugging the LAN cable, switch off the power of the recorder
and the PC.
When plugging or unplugging the LAN cable, hold the plug portion of the cable.
When unplugging, do not pull on the LAN cable but unplug while pressing down on
the lock.
Do not connect the modular phone cable to the LAN port.
Since there are various connection configurations, please follow the specifications of
your telecommunication carrier or internet service provider. Plug
Lock portion
Preparation for Network Navi (Continued)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM146
147
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
2: Recorders setup - Network Setting
1While stopped, press SETUP.
The setup screen will be displayed.
2Select Management settings by / , and
press ENTER.
3Select Network Setting by / , and press
ENTER.
The Network Setting screen will be displayed.
4Following the table on the next page, set each
items on the Network Navi, Address/Proxy
and Mail Setting screen.
User Name and Password must be entered to prevent
unauthorized access. The username and password should be
unique so that others cannot guess them easily. The setting
cannot be completed unless the username and password are
entered.
5After the setting is completed, select Save
and press ENTER.
The settings will be stored.
Start the setup for the PC.
Select a tab to
change screens.
Start
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu lan
g
ua
g
e En
g
lish
Management settings
Network Setting
Genre setting
Front Display On
ff
Network Setting
Network Navi Address/Proxy
Recorder Name RD-XS
54
User Name
Password
Port number
80
Mail Setting
Network Navi Settings
N t D bbi S tti
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM147
148
Network Navi
Items for setting (Network Navi screen)
Recorder Name
User Name
Password
Port Number
Up to 15 single-byte
alphanumeric characters or
symbols
Up to 16 single-byte
alphanumeric characters or
symbols
Up to 16 single-byte
alphanumeric characters or
symbols
80
Request from another
device
Group Name
Group Password
Net Dubbing Settings
Normally there is no need to change this setting. When multiple
units of the recorder are connected, make changes for each unit.
This is an ID to access the recorder from a PC.
Select a username that is unique and not known to or easily
guessed by others. (Example of usernames to avoid: your name or
your familys name, telephone number, birth date, street number of
address, and car license plate numbers, as well as repetition of the
same number or symbol.)
This is a password to access the recorder from a PC.
Select a password that is unique and not known to or easily
guessed by others. (Example of passwords to avoid: your name or
your familys name, telephone number, birth date, street number of
address, and car license plate numbers, as well as repetition of the
same number or symbol.)
When the password is entered, the characters are displayed as * .
If you forget the password, enter a new password.
Normally there is no need to change this setting. When the
connection cannot be made or a feature is not operating, change
the value to a number between 2000 and 10000.
Accept
Reject
e.g.: TOSHIBA
Select this setting when multiple Toshiba HDD & DVD video
recorders are connected to the network and dubbing is done to and
from various equipment.
This will not allow dubbing through the internet.
This sets the group name when multiple units are connected to the
network.
This sets the password when a group name is set.
Network Navi Settings
Items for setting (Address/Proxy screen)
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS
DNS Server
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
MAC Address
Connection Check*
*
When Connection Check is pressed, items that were changed on the Address/Proxy and Mail Setting screens will be saved,
and you will not be able to return to the previous setting. Keeping a record of the setting is recommended as a precaution.
Manual
If the IP address of the PC is
192.168.1.10.
e.g.: 192.168.1.15
e.g.: 255.255.255.0
e.g.: 192.168.1.1
Manual
e.g.:192.168.1.1
80
(Unable to set)
Network information will be manually set.
This sets a different address within the same subnet of the PC
connected to the recorder.
This sets the subnet mask of the network environment that will be
connected.
This is set when the recorder uses a gateway.
Fixed to Manual if DHCP is set to Manual.
Manually enter the DNS server address.
There is no need to set in this case.
There is no need to change in this case.
The MAC address that is established for each recorder is displayed.
It cannot be changed.
It checks the connection of the recorder and the PC.
Note: Please disregard the message regarding DNS server if it is
displayed after Connection Check is pressed.
Note
Private IP address can be set. (e.g.: 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.254)
When directly connecting to a PC
When using a PC with an always-on internet connection and directly connecting via router
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Auto
(Setting unnecessary)
(Setting unnecessary)
This automatically obtains network information.
The IP address that is obtained from the DHCP server is displayed.
The subnet mask that is obtained from the DHCP server is displayed.
Preparation for Network Navi (Continued)
Note: Toshiba recommends that you take the following minimum general security precautions in connection with choosing a User Name and
Password in connection with the Network Navi features of the recorder:
Choose a unique User Name and Password that would be difficult for someone else to guess (e.g., do not use the same password that you
use for your email account, router, etc.).
Do not share your User Name and Password with anyone.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM148
149
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Default Gateway
DNS, DNS Server
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
MAC Address
Connection Check*
Note
Please contact the router manufacturer when the router DHCP feature is not operating properly (in such a case, an error
will occur since the default gateway and the DNS server IP address cannot be obtained).
(Setting unnecessary)
Auto
Manual
Up to 63 single-byte
alphanumeric characters or
symbols
80
(Unable to set)
The default gateway that is obtained from the DHCP server is
displayed.
When Use is selected, the DNS server address is automatically
obtained from the DHCP server.
Manually enter the DNS server address.
Enter the proxy server address when your provider requires proxy
setting.
Normally there is no need to change this setting.
When required, change the value to a number between 1 and 65535.
The MAC address that is established for each recorder is displayed.
It cannot be changed.
This checks the connection between the recorder and the router.
* When Connection Check is pressed, items that were changed on the Address/Proxy and Mail Setting screens will be
saved, and you will not be able to return to the previous setting. Keeping a record of the setting is recommended as a
precaution.
Items for setting (Mail Setting screen)
Mail Function
Mail Keyword
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
APOP
Accept
From
Completion Notice
SMTP Server Address
Sender Address
Secondary Address
Disable
Enable
e.g.: rdstyle
e.g.: XXX.XXX.com
Enable
Disable
Only
All
e.g.:
XXXXX@XXX.XXX.com
Disable
Secondary Address
Return to sender
Secondary Address and
sender
e.g.: XXX.XXX.com
e.g.:
XXXXXXX@XXX.XXX.com
e.g.:
XXXXXXX@XXX.XXX.com
This will disable the use of the mail function.
This will enable the use of the mail function.
This sets 6-20 single-byte alphanumeric characters so that the email
for the mail function can be recognized. Symbols should not be
used since they will cause error and timer recording setting by email
will not be successful.
This sets the POP3 server address. (Enter up to 63 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.)
This sets the username for accessing the POP3 server. Enter up to
63 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
This sets the password for accessing the POP3 server. Enter up to
16 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
This enables the use of APOP (Authenticated POP*).
This disables the use of APOP (Authenticated POP*).
Only one email address is set as the sender.
No specific email address is set as the sender.
When Accept is set to Only, enter the email address of the
sender up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Email notification is not sent when timer recording setting by email is
completed.
When timer recording setting by email is completed, notice is sent to
the completion-notice contact address.
When timer recording setting by email is completed, notice is sent to
the email senders address.
When timer recording setting by email function is completed, notice
is sent to both completion-notice contact address and the email
senders address.
This sets the SMTP server address.**
Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
This sets the email address of your internet providers email service.
Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
This sets the email address for sending notice when timer recording
setting by email is completed. Enter up to 63 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
Depending on the recorders operating mode, the timer recording setting may not be successful.
* APOP: Password encrypting POP. For details, consult your ISP.
** The address of POP3 Server Address will be copied if you leave here blank.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM149
150
Network Navi
Preparation for Network Navi (Continued)
Setting example - Sender of timer recording setting mail and receiver of completion notice
POP3 Server Address yyy.zzz.com
Mail Function Enable abc1234Mail Keyword
POP3 User Name xxxx
POP3 Password aaabbb
Only
Return to sender
yyy.zzz.com
homeadd@yyy.zzz.com
homeadd@yyy.zzz.com
Enable
Accept
SMTP Server Address
Sender Address
Secondary Address Connection Check
From
APOP
Completion Notice
POP3 Server Address yyy.zzz.com
Mail Function Enable abc1234Mail Keyword
POP3 User Name xxxx
POP3 Password aaabbb
Only
Secondary Address
yyy.zzz.com
homeadd@yyy.zzz.com
mobileadd@yy...
homeadd@yyy.zzz.com
Enable
Accept
SMTP Server Address
Sender Address
Secondary Address Connection Check
From
APOP
Completion Notice
POP3 Server Address yyy.zzz.com
Mail Function Enable abc1234Mail Keyword
POP3 User Name xxxx
POP3 Password aaabbb
Only
Secondary Address and Sender
yyy.zzz.com
homeadd@yyy.zzz.com
homeadd@yyy...
mobileadd@yyy.zzz.com
Enable
Accept
SMTP Server Address
Sender Address
Secondary Address Connection Check
From
APOP
Completion Notice
Timer recording
setting mail from:
homeadd@yyy.zzz.com
mobileadd@yyy.zzz.com
Completion notice
received at: Settings
e.g.
e.g.
Select Return to sender.
Select Secondary Address.
Select Secondary Address
and Sender.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM150
151
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
3: Setting up the PC
Settings for the PC will be different depending on the operating system. Please read the user’s manual of your PC for
details. The following instructions are for Windows® XP.
When using the PC with an always-on internet connection, the setting is normally already at “Auto”
(automatically obtained IP address). Therefore, no change in setting is required. Proceed to “4: Starting
Network Navi”. If “Network Navi” does not start, change the setting for the recorder according to the setting
of the PC “TCP/IP properties”.
Setting up the PC (when directly connecting to
the PC)
1 “Control panel” “Network connections”
click “Properties” of “Local area connection”
click “Properties” of “Internet protocol (TCP/
IP)”.
Select “Use next IP address” to set the IP address
and subnet mask.
When setting has been previously established,
keeping a record of the original setting prior to any
changes is recommended so that it can be
changed back.
1 “IP address”:
Set to 192.168.1.10.
(Set an IP address that should be different from
that of the recorder.)
2 “Subnet mask”:
Set to 255.255.255.0.
2 Click “OK” on the screen.
After clicking “OK”, follow the instructions on the
PC. It may be necessary to restart your PC.
Proceed to “4: Starting Network Navi”.
Notes
If you are connected to the internet, you may not be able to
connect if you specify the IP address. Change to the
original settings when connecting to the internet.
When using Mac OS X, open “Apple Symbol” “System
environment setting” “Network” “TCP/IP”. Set the
setting method to “Manual input” and enter the IP address
and subnet mask.
q
w
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 6:51 PM151
152
Network Navi
Preparation for Network Navi (Continued)
4: Starting Network Navi
Start Network Navi to set up/operate the recorder using a PC.
The following instructions are for Windows® XP.
1Launch the internet browser to start using the Network Navi on the PC.
Screen images of Windows® Internet Explorer are
used as examples in this users manual.
When the Back button on the browser is used to
return to the previous page, the setting and display
may not be set correctly.
2Enter the address http://RD-XS55, and press the ENTER key of the PC.
For Mac OS X or when access cannot be made using
the address with the recorder name, press SETUP on
the remote control. Then enter the IP address on the
Network Setting screen of Management Settings
for the recorder instead of the recorder name.
(e.g.: http://192.168.1.15/)
When the address is entered, the Main Menu will be
displayed. A screen will be displayed for entering
User Name and Password which were established
during the network setup of the recorder. Enter the
User Name and Password. If you want to set your
favorites or bookmarks in the browser, it should be
done at this time.
3-A
When connecting directly to the PC:
Click the desired feature from the Main Menu.
3-B
When connecting to the PC with an always-on internet connection:
Click Network Navi Settings from the Main Menu.
Follow the instructions on the pages that follow to establish the settings.
Notes
For some routers, the assigned IP address may change frequently depending on DHCP.
To check the IP address of the recorder using the router management software, find the assigned IP address that matches
the MAC address displayed on the Address/Proxy screen of Network Setting.
If the Port number under Network Setting is set at a value other than 80, enter the Port number after the recorder name
or IP address. (e.g.: For a port number of 2000, use http://RD-XS55:2000/.)
If the proxy setting is made, accessing may fail.
When the recorder is in operation, you might not be able to make the setting even if you can use the Network Navi.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 6:51 PM152
153
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
5: Network Navi Settings
Settings for Network Navi features of the recorder.
Set up for exporting CSV File Format
Other Settings
Program Description Include
Exclude
This allows program descriptions to be included when saving Library
information to a CSV file.
This saves to a CSV file without program descriptions.
Upgrade page address
Access Port Number
www3.toshiba.co.jp/dvd/mtn/
Normally set to 1048
It can be set between 1048
and 1999.
This sets the address of the maintenance service page, from which
you can download update software of the recorder.
When multiple units are used and the remote-control screen freezes
in Internet Explorer or Netscape, change the numbers of each unit.
Note
When there is a change in the environment of the destination, such as when connecting to the PC for the first time, redo the
Network Setting ( page 147) on the recorder.
Click
Net Monitor Settings
See page 164.
Click
1Click Setup Menu on the Main Menu.
2Click the item to be set and select the value or enter the data.
For the content to be set, see below.
3Click Save after the setting is completed.
The settings are saved.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 6:51 PM153
154
Network Navi
Network Navi features
Displaying thumbnails (Title List) ........................................................ 155
Operating with the remote control screen .......................................... 157
Net Keyboard .................................................................................................................... 158
Operation using the Virtual Remote Control ...................................................................... 159
Using Library Information (Library) ..................................................... 160
Finding the disc containing the title you want to view (Sorting Library information) ........... 160
Viewing title information .................................................................................................... 160
Making file output of Library information to a PC ............................................................... 160
Displaying a list of remaining space by each disc number (Disc List) ................................ 160
Setting for custom menu addition (Custom Menu Editor) ................. 161
Net Dubbing ........................................................................................... 163
Dubbing to a device on the same network ......................................................................... 163
Net Monitor ............................................................................................. 165
Setting a timer recording using email ................................................. 168
Setting a timer recording by directly specifying the date, time, and channel ..................... 168
Useful features of timer recording setting using email ....................................................... 169
If you are having a difficulty with Network Navi features .................. 170
Network Navi
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM154
155
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Displaying thumbnails (Title List)
When the Title List Editor is clicked in the Main Menu, the thumbnails and information of the titles
recorded on the HDD, DVD-RAM, or DVD-R/RW will be displayed. The title information such as the title
names and genres can be changed*. It will take some time for them to be displayed.
* A DVD-R/RW (Video Mode) that was recorded on another device cannot be displayed or changed.
A finalized DVD-R/RW can be displayed but cannot be changed.
To change pages, click or at the
top of the window.
1When the Title List Editor is clicked in the Main Menu, the thumbnails
and information of the titles recorded on the internal HDD, DVD-RAM, and
DVD-R/RW will be displayed.
Points on thumbnail display
Settings are the same as those on the list. When the recorder is in operation (such as in play mode),
changes cannot be made.
(In the following situations, the thumbnails may become black or may not be displayed.)
Recorders operating mode (such as in play mode)
Copy-once title and chapter thumbnails
Title thumbnails and chapter thumbnails recorded on DVD-R/RW (Video mode)
A program which has never had a thumbnail display on the recorder will appear as a black screen on
the PC and the thumbnail display will not be shown. In such a case, make changes to the thumbnail
screen using the Content Menu on the recorder. (There are thumbnails which cannot be
displayed.)
For a Macintosh computer, Chapter List will not be displayed even if the thumbnail is clicked.
If you click on the thumbnail or Title Name
of a title you want to change or view its
information, the Chapter List screen will be
displayed.
2Click on the Title Name of a title that you want to change or view its
information.
The title details and chapter list will be displayed.
The area that can be changed will be in a window which will accept text input.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM155
156
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
3Click on an item that you want to change, and select a value or input data.
For the content of settings, see the following Items for setting.
4After the setting is completed, click Save.
The title information will be set.
When you click Return before saving the change, the content of the setting will not be changed and you
will return to the title list display.
Notes
Changes cannot be made while the recorder is in operation (such as in play mode).
The program description cannot be saved in a Playlist.
Items for setting
Title Name
Date
Genre
Lock
Program Description
Chapter Name
Lock
Unlock
This allows you to name the recorded title.
Enter up to 64 single-byte letters.
This allows you to set the year, month, day, and start time of the recording.
This allows you to set the genre of the recorded program.
This protects against unintentional deleting or editing of the recorded title.
This does not protect the recorded title.
This allows you to add an explanation of the program material.
Enter up to 800 single-byte letters, including line breaks and spaces.
This allows you to name the chapter.
Enter up to 64 single-byte letters.
Click.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM156
157
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Operating with the remote control screen
Using this feature, you can operate the recorder using a PC just like using the remote control included
with the recorder.
1Click “Virtual Remote Control” on the Main Menu.
The remote control and the display area are shown on
the right side and the bottom of the same window as
Network Navi.
2Click on a button on the remote control screen.
The remote control screen will operate in the same way as when you press
a button on the regular remote control.
Note
The display content will renew every second.
View of the display area
e.g.
Notes
The displaying of the remote control screen may take some time.
This feature may not work depending on the disc.
The recorder response to the remote control command may take time depending on the recorder’s operating mode and
communication condition within the network.
If the remote control screen is not displayed properly, clear the browser’s cache.
If you use multiple units of the recorder within the same network, you will need to set up a different “Port Number” for each
unit.
TIME SLIP
Title
Chapter
Title
elapsed-time
Click
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 6:52 PM157
158
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
View of the Virtual Remote Control
Net Keyboard
If the recorders character input window is started while the Virtual Remote Control is displayed, the Net Keyboard
screen will be displayed on the PC.
If you enter using Net Keyboard and click Enter, the Net Keyboard will close. This will be reflected in the recorders
character input window.
Note
If you click Cancel on the Net Keyboard, the Net Keyboard will close. This will not be reflected in the recorders character
input window.
Main panel Sub panel
Switch between the Main panel and
Sub panel by clicking these areas.
If you click on this area,
the remote control will
open and close.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM158
159
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Operation using the Virtual Remote Control
You can have remote control operations using the mouse of a PC.
Setting up the Virtual Remote Control
If the remote control screen is starting up, begin the
setup after the screen has finished displaying.
1 Click Setup Menu on the Main Menu.
2 Click on the Setup for Virtual Remote Control
button.
A setup screen for the remote control will appear.
3 Change the setting to desired operation that is
done through a mouse to suit your needs.
4 Click Save.
Notes
Enter under Threshold value of a scroll wheel the number
of rotations of the wheel when you are using a mouse.
In Customization Menu for the Virtual Remote Control, set
the recorders operation for each mouse usage time.
The Virtual Remote Control requires the installation of Java
VM v. 1.5 (1.4.2 for Mac OS X). To check the Java version
which is available, click on the Confirmation of Java
software version button in the lower right of the screen.
Using the Virtual Remote Control
Operate the mouse within the frame of the remote-
control screen.
Operate by using the mouse pointer within this
frame. If you click outside of this frame, the device
will not operate.
The recorder will operate according to the setup of the
Virtual Remote Control.
Note
If you setup the Virtual Remote Control while the display of
the remote control screen is activated, you will need to
restart the remote control screen and then operate the
Virtual Remote Control.
Turning the recorder on/off by the Virtual
Remote Control
Click the power button of the Virtual Remote Control.
The indicator of the button shows the recorder status.
(on: green, off: red)
Note
If the recorders power is turned off on the recorder, any
Network Navi operation opens the Main Menu, on which
only the power button is available.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM159
160
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
Using Library information (Library)
Like in the Library, you can easily find a disc with remaining space or a desired disc by using stored
information for each title such as the recorded time and date, where it is recorded, the title name, and the
genre. In addition, Network Navi can make a CSV-format file output of the Library information to a PC.
1Click Library in the Main Menu.
The information for each title will be displayed in a list.
To change the page, click or in the window.
Finding the disc containing the title
you want to view
Arranging Library information
Click on the names of the items that you want to
arrange. When you click Media, Title Name, Ch,
Date, Day, Time, Genre, or Remain Time, the
items will be rearranged. (However, the HDD
remaining time will be displayed as “– –”.)
Notes
There may be some differences between the results of the
sorting mentioned here and those in the recorders Library.
Library Narrowing, a feature of the recorder, cannot be
done here.
When the settings for Recalculation of remaining space
based on Quality are changed, the remaining space will
change corresponding to the changed settings for recorded
AV quality.
The settings displayed under the recalculation of remaining
space can be changed in AV record quality.
Searching a title by specifying a keyword
Enter a keyword and ckick Searching.
Titles containing the keyword in their names are
sorted.
To cancel, Click Cancel Narrowings.
Viewing title information
Click on the title name.
The title information will be displayed.
Note
You cannot change the title information here.
Making file output of Library
information to a PC
Click Save in the CSV title format.
Library information will be saved in CSV format.
Follow the instructions on the PC screen, and perform
the steps for saving.
Note
Saving in CSV format is done at the initial stages of the
Library display. The results of Arrange will not be reflected.
Displaying a list of remaining space by
each disc number (Disc List)
Click Disc List.
For all DVD-RAM information saved on HDD or the
recorder, a list of remaining space on each disc will be
displayed according to disc number, disc name, and
recorded AV quality.
Every time you click on the number, disc name,
remaining space in the index, you can sort the list with
the clicked line as reference.
Notes
The remaining space on the disc will not be displayed
unless the disc is saved on the recorder.
The settings for remaining space which are displayed as 1-
5 can be changed in AV record quality.
When you click Media, Title Name, Ch, Date, Day,
Time, Genre, or Remain Time, you can perform a
Narrowing of the data that you clicked.
For the Arrange, the results will be saved for the previous
three sorts.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM160
161
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Setting for custom menu addition (Custom Menu Editor)
When creating a DVD-R/RW, this feature will allow you to set and add 16 types of images that are
separate from the 8 types of custom menu which initially came with the recorder.
1Click Custom Menu Editor in the Main Menu.
The Custom Menu Editor screen will be displayed.
2Specify the bitmap file that you want to use for a custom menu.
You can click Browse to select the file.
You can enter the Menu Name. You can also save it
without entering a name.
3Select Use a background for Title/Chapter, Color, or Transparency.
Use a background for Title/Chapter:
Items such as the disc name, title name, and chapter
name may become more difficult to read depending
on the background image.
In such a case, set the background for the title/
chapter to Ye s .
Color:
This sets the background color for the title/chapter.
Transparency:
This sets the degree of transparency for the
background of the title/chapter. The larger the
number, the more transparent the background of the
title/ chapter, and the background image will be more
visible.
You will need:
Images that you want to use on the menu screen (Windows bitmap format (bmp),*1 24 bit color, 720 x 480*2 pixels (72
dpi))
If the format is the same, you can save an image from Mac OS as is (72 dpi).
Since PC and TV display images differently, an image which appears normal on the PC may appear elongated on the TV. An
image will appear normally on the TV and can be used as a background if you first create an image on the PC that is 640 x
480 pixel size, then elongate this image horizontally to 720 x 480 pixel size.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM161
162
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
4Select Font Color, Cursor Position Color, and Cursor Enter Color.
Font Color:
This is the font color for items displayed on the menu
such as disc name, title name, chapter name, page
number, and title/chapter time. The Return button
that goes back to the title menu will have a white
background with a black frame regardless of the
setting.
Cursor Position Color:
The color that will be shown when you navigate the
title menu.
Cursor Enter Color:
The color to be shown when you execute (i.e. press
ENTER).
5Click Save.
The user custom menu that was set will be sent to the recorder.
The set custom menu will be displayed towards the bottom of this screen.
Deleting the user custom menu
Select Number and click Delete.
To use the saved user custom menu on the
recorder
Click on the Next button in Title Menu Select and
Chapter Menu Select under DVD-Video Create.
Display and select the saved user menu. If you select
Prev you will return to the preset menu.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM162
163
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Net Dubbing
You can perform dubbing by designating equipment (Toshibas HDD & DVD video recorder) on the same
network as the dubbing destination.
Net Dubbing can also be performed in Dub Select Items.
The following conditions are required to use this feature.
The model must be compatible with Net Dubbing.
It must have the same subnet connection as the recorder (such as by being connected to the same router or being
directly connected to each other by a crossover cable).
The setup is done in Net Dubbing Settings under Network Setting.
- Set Request from another device to Accept.
- Give a Group Name. (All devices that you want to dub must be set with the same group name.)
- Set a Group Password. (All devices that you want to dub must be set with the same password.)
These devices must be in the following conditions.
1 Their power is on. (Insert a disc if applicable.)
2 They are in stop mode.
You can use a setting to automatically shut off the
power after dubbing is completed. (You cannot use
this setting for the device that is the dubbing
destination.)
During the dubbing, press QUICK MENU and
select Auto Power OFF using / , then press
ENTER.
Even if you selected Auto Power OFF, the power
may not switch off for certain cases such as when a
timer recording has started.
Notes
This feature is available only for models that are compatible
with Net Dubbing. A drive that was not expected at the
release of the recorder may be recognized in the future. In
such a case, the drive column may show a number such as
#5 when connecting to a future model. This is not a
malfunction. After you check which drive it is, perform the
dubbing. In addition, there may be some future model in
which dubbing may not be supported to some drives.
In Net Dubbing, only copying can be done. Therefore,
dubbing cannot be done for copy-prohibited titles and
chapters of copy-once programs.
A DVD-R/RW (Video mode) cannot be used as a dubbing
destination or origin.
Net Dubbing is a feature of High speed dubbing. Rate
conversion dubbing cannot be done.
Net Dubbing will be interrupted if a timer recording starts
during Net Dubbing. Redo Net Dubbing after the
completion of the timer recording.
When using the Net Dubbing feature, noises may occur on
images received by the recorders tuner and external input
due to the increase in data access of the network. Usage
of Net Dubbing is recommended when recording from
these inputs is not being performed.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other
materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.
Source will be Title.
AAA
B
B
Title
Original
Start
Capacity
HDD
EDIT
MENU
Dub To: DVD
Device name Dubbing Media
Device select Searching
RD-Z1
HDD DVD
TAKASHI
HDD DVD
TARO_1
HDD DVD
TARO_2
HDD DVD
TARO_3
HDD DVD
CHIHIRO
HDD DVD
MIRINA
HDD DVD
LOVE
HDD DVD
Dub Selected Items
Dub Selected
Items
Dubbing to a device on the same
network
1 Select a part to copy/move on Edit Menu, then
press QUICK MENU. Select Change media to
NET from Quick Menu, then press ENTER.
When you first select the part that you want to dub
and then switch to the dubbing destination, a
message will be displayed. If you do not want to
cancel the selected part, choose No.
Select a destination for dubbing, and then a display
will appear on the screen. The display will show the
devices within the network that can be specified as
a dubbing destination (up to 8 devices).
2 Select a network device name using / , then
press ENTER.
Multiple devices cannot be selected.
3 Select the destination for dubbing using / ,
then press ENTER.
Dubbing will begin.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM163
164
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
Directly connecting Net Dubbing compatible
models
By directly connecting with the Net Dubbing
compatible device, you can dub without the network
environment. It is necessary to set the compatible
devices IP address to an address that is different but
within the same subnet as the recorders.
1 Make the Network Setting on page 147.
Setup as in the example below.
DHCP:
Not used (both for the recorder and compatible)
IP Address
192.168.1.10 (IP address of the recorder)
192.168.1.15 (separate compatible device)
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 (for both the recorder and
compatible device)
Default Gateway:
192.168.1.1 (for both the recorder and compatible
device)
DNS Server:
192.168.1.1 (for both the recorder and compatible
device)
2 Select Save to save the settings.
If you want to abort the copy/move
1 Press QUICK MENU while the copy/move is in
process.
Quick Menu will be displayed.
2 Select Cancel Dubbing using / , then press
ENTER.
Notes
If you abort copy/transfer, the portion being dubbed will be
deleted at the dubbing destination.
For DVD-R, there will be reduced space from any amount
of content that has already been written even though the
process may have been aborted.
Recorder Net Dubbing compatible device
To LAN portTo LAN port
LAN cable (crossover type, included)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM164
165
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Net Monitor
A TV program which is being broadcasted or has been recorded can be viewed on a PC that is
connected to the recorder. (In other cases, Net Monitor may not operate normally.)
Net Monitor can be used to stream content (live tuner or recorded content) from the recorder to the PC
for viewing in your home office.
The following conditions are required to use Net Monitor.
QuickTime® (v 7.0.2) must be installed on the PC
connected to the recorder.
Caution
The operation of Net Monitor is not guaranteed on all PCs.
In addition, Net Monitor is not guaranteed to work for future
versions of QuickTime®.
Note
The features of Net Monitor are to be used on a PC that is
connected within the same subnetwork as the recorder.
If multiple PCs are connected to one recorder, the features
of the Virtual Remote Control and Net Monitor can be used
on only one PC.
Net Monitor Settings
The following settings are required to use Net Monitor.
1 Click Setup Menu in the Main Menu.
2 Establish the settings for Net Monitor.
Size of Video window:
Set the monitor window size of Net Monitor.
Average bit rate:
Set the speed of the data transfer from the recorder
to the PC.
If you set the average bit rate to high, you will have
a better image than if you set the monitor window
image to low. However, the data transfer may be
unstable due to the communication load.
Buffering time:
When transferring audio and video data from the
recorder to the PC, a streaming format is used. For
streaming, you will need to set the wait time
(buffering time). The time will be set according to
the processing speed of the PC and the network
environment. If the images do not play properly,
adjust the buffering time.
3 Click on the Save button.
The content of the setting will be saved in the
browser.
Starting Net Monitor
1
Click on the Net Monitor icon in the Main Menu.
The window of Net Monitor will be displayed.
The image will be displayed after the QuickTime®
startup screen is shown for 3-8 seconds,
depending on the buffering time that was set.
Viewing using Net Monitor
Use Virtual Remote Control when operating the
recorder using Net Monitor.
While using Net Monitor, you can operate the recorder
with the buttons on the recorder or remote control
which is included with the recorder.
1 Click on the Virtual Remote Control button.
The same operation can be performed as when
pressing the buttons of the recorders remote
control.
Compared to TV, the images in the monitor window
of Net Monitor will be displayed with a few seconds
delay depending on the setting of the buffering
time. Therefore, please note that if you perform
chapter editing while watching something in the
monitor window of Net Monitor, the edited material
may be divided at different location compared to
what was intended.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or
revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs,
and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal
liability.
Note: Certain factors including, without limitation, the
available bandwidth and quality of your internet
connection, and the connection between the recorder and
your PC, may cause a delay and/or error in the displaying
of content on your PC. Such delays and/or errors, if any,
may be more pronounced when the recorder is connected
via a wireless LAN.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM165
166
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
View of the monitor window
Notes
The aspect ratio displayed in the monitor window is 4:3.
The screen in the monitor window displays a wider area than that of a TV. Therefore, the outer area may flicker.
If you close the Virtual Remote Control or browser during monitoring, the monitor window will also close.
You can view the monitor window for up to 9 continuous hours. After 9 hours, the monitor will stop temporarily and then it will
resume automatically.
If you make changes to the Network Setting using the recorder, the monitor will stop temporarily, and then it will resume
automatically.
If you display the monitor window while the recorder is displaying the PinP screen, the PinP screen will terminate. In addition,
the PinP feature will not be usable while the monitor window is displayed.
If the program that is broadcasting is a bilingual program, Net Monitor will output the main audio to the L channel and
auxiliary audio to the R channel regardless of the sound multiplex setting.
When you play the title that was recorded using a dual-monaural setting on the recorder, the audio output will follow the
sound multiplex setting during the play.
If a firewall is set on a PC connected to the recorder, the PC may not accept the audio-visual data. In such a case, cancel the
firewall setting on the PC or set the Streaming Transport of QuickTime® Player to HTTP.
If RTSP Proxy Server is set in the QuickTime® Players Streaming Proxy setting, operation may not occur properly in some
cases.
In the monitor window, the mouse and keyboard shortcuts of QuickTime® Player are available, but the shortcuts of some
features are not available.
Quick Time is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
The screen may
temporarily lock if you
click on the monitor
window with a mouse.
To release, double click or
close the monitor window
and then reopen.
If a monitor window size
over 900 x 600 is set, a
separate window opens
to display images from
the recorder.
The following conditions will
be displayed in the monitor
window.
If the screen size is set small
and the condition display
message is long, a part of the
message may not be displayed.
Preparing:
The monitor window is started,
and it is preparing for a display.
Monitoring:
This indicates that the monitor
is running.
Net Monitor is not
available:
It indicates the unavailability of
the monitor. Please read the
section On Net Monitor is not
available due to recorder
conditions.
Since an image that is displayed
in the monitor window is more
compressed than that on TV, the
image will be less clear.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM166
167
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Net Monitor Help
Check the following items if Net Monitor is
not operating properly.
Are the following compatible with Network Navi
(Net Monitor): The OS used, browser type and
version, and Java VM version?
DOS/V compatible device:
OS: Windows® 2000/XP
Browser: Internet Explorer 6.0
Java VM: Ver. 1.5
Macintosh:
OS: Mac OS X (10.4)
Browser: Safari 2.0
Java VM: Ver. 1.4.2
Do you have the correct version and settings of the
installed QuickTime®; the correct connection
between the recorder and PC network; and the
correct setting of the browser in use?
QuickTime® version:
For both Windows® and Mac OS, check to see if
QuickTime® 7.0.2 is installed.
QuickTime® setting:
Check the setting of the Streaming Transport of
QuickTime® Player.
Select UDP: This is normally selected.
Select HTTP: In the case where a firewall is set up
on your PC, the image will be transferred properly
from the recorder to the PC if you select this option.
Check the setting of Streaming Proxy of
QuickTime® Player.
Select RTSP: In some cases Net Monitor does not
operate properly if RTSP Proxy Server is setup.
Check the network connection:
Confirm that the Network Navi features can be
used properly.
Confirm that the recorder and PC are within the
same subnet.
Check the browser setting:
Confirm that Java is usable in the set browser.
Monitor window image shakes or stops.
Set the window size smaller.
Check the bit rate and buffering time that was set:
The settings must be made in accordance with the
PC connected to the recorder and network
environment. In some cases, if you setup according
to the processing speed of the PC, you may be
able to view properly during a replay or broadcast.
On Net Monitor is not available due to recorder conditions
A message will be displayed and viewing of the monitor cannot be done under conditions such as the following:
Monitor window message
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
currently recording)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
now Rate Conversion Dubbing)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
creating a DVD-Video menu)
Net Monitor is not available (Detected a copy prohibited
signal)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
playing)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
displaying the GUI for recording from a DV device)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
powered off)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorders
input is selected as Line-U)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
playing DVD-Video with an audio contents at an
unsupported rate -96kHz)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
finalizing a DVD-Video)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is
dubbing to the internal HDD)
Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorders
GUI is displaying the Net Dubbing screen)
The recorder condition
Recorder tuner conditions: 15 seconds before the timer recording, in
Timeslip mode, during timer recording, or during regular recording.
Recorder condition: Rate Conversion Dubbing
Recorder condition: DVD-Video menu creating
Conditions: Broadcasting a copy-once or copy prohibited image;
playing a copy prohibited image on a disc, previewing of a copy
prohibited title, playing of a copy prohibited title on the editing screen
Recorder condition: CD playing
Recorder condition: during DV recording on GUI displaying
Recorder condition: In the process of switching power off or the power
is off
Recorder condition: Line-U is selected
Recorder condition: Playing 96 kHz Audio of a DVD-Video
Recorder condition: DVD-Video finalizing
Recorder condition: Dubbing to the HDD
Recorder condition: Net Dubbing
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM167
168
Network Navi
Network Navi features (Continued)
Setting a timer recording using email
You can remotely set a timer recording using email.
Preparation
Connect the recorder to the internet, and turn on the power of each equipment.
Set the Mail Setting under Network Setting.
Change the mail software setting to text format. (Timer recording setting by email is not compatible with email in
HTML format.)
A trial run of timer recording setting by email is recommended to test its operation before an actual run.
Notes
Depending on the software for sending timer recording
setting email, a part of the first line may go to a new line if
it is long. If this occurs, timer recording setting content will
not be read correctly.
If there is an excessively large number of email messages
on the mail server, the timer recording setting email may
not be received.
When the recorder does not have an always-on internet
connection, timer recording setting using email cannot be
done.
In some cases, a timer recording might not be possible
depending on the start time of the timer recording and the
recorders operating mode.
An email account compatible with POP3 or APOP is
required as a destination of timer recording setting email.
You cannot use an account such as a cell phone email
address in which you cannot send or receive email from
your home PC.
If you receive email using a PC which is set to
automatically delete email from the mail server, the
recorder may not receive the timer recording setting email.
Only one timer recording setting can be done per email.
If an email message begins with the same format as the
timer recording setting email, it may be regarded as a timer
recording setting email and may be received by the
recorder instead of the PC.
If the email timer recording keyword is entered incorrectly,
you will not be able to set a timer recording. In addition, if a
symbol is part of the email timer recording keyword, it will
cause an error. Therefore, you will not be able to set a
timer recording.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Category
Header
Keyword
Description
Description
Date(Month/Day/Year)
Start time (0100-1259)
End time (0100-1259)
Program CH
Recording Quality
Media
Character
open
(same keyword from Setup
menu)
prog
add
mmddyyyy
hhmmam/hhmmpm
hhmmam/hhmmpm
TV
CATV
C.BOX
Satellite box
Line in
SP
SP-Audio
MP
LP
EP
SEP
EXP
EXP-Audio
XP
XP-Audio
User
HDD
DVD
269
CAT1125
CBX0999
SAT09999
*
L1, L2, L3
SP
SPA
MP
LP
EP
SEP
EXP
EXPA
XP
XPA
User
SH
SD
Setting a timer recording by directly specifying the date, time, and channel
1 Enter the email destination (To:).
Enter the Sender Address that was set in Mail Setting.
e.g. XXXXXXXX@XXX.XXX.com
2 Enter the content of a timer recording in the body of the email.
Enter text in single-byte letters. (Both capitalized and non-capitalized letters can be used.)
Enter a space between each item.
e.g. open rdstyle prog add 04012006 1100am 0130pm CAT125 SP SH
l l l l l l l l l l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Toshiba is not responsible for any damage or loss caused directly or indirectly by the failure of the recorder to record
content intended to be recorded.
Toshiba is not responsible for, nor has any control over, any content recorded and/or viewed using the recorder.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.
** Omissible.
When not specified, the recorder selects HDD
as the recording media, SP as the recording
quality. For the other recording settings, the
setup menus are referred to.
*Input by 3 or 4 digits according to the setting ( page 44,
INSTALLATION GUIDE). If not, the timer recording will not
be executed.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM168
169
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Useful features of timer recording
setting using email
Receiving timer recording setting email
The recorder receives timer recording setting email on
the POP server at 15-minute intervals.
Note
The recorder cannot receive timer recording setting email
while displaying a GUI on a connected TV. Therefore, a
prolonged GUI view on the TV may cause failure in timer
recording setting using email.
When setting is successful (setting completion
email)
When the recorder receives the timer recording
setting email, you can receive email that notifies
you of setting completion or setting failure. Make
the following settings.
Set Completion Notice to Secondary Address
and sender, Return to sender, or Secondary
Address.
If Completion Notice is set to Secondary Address
and sender or Secondary Address, enter the
email address (secondary address) at which you
would like to receive the notice in Secondary
Address.
When setting is successful
e.g.
The timer recording from the e-mail
was saved correctly.
Date: Sun 4/3/06
Start Time: 01:00am
End Time: 02:00am
Channel: CBX015
mailto: email address (email address set in
Network Navi Setting)?subject = subject line
(delete timer recording setting of RD -
XS55.)&body=open%20password
(password set in Network Navi
Setting)%20prog&20del%20setting ID(ID of the
timer recording setting)
When setting is unsuccessful
You will be notified of the reason for not being
able to set the timer recording.
Notes
If there is an error on the recorder side, you will not be
able to set a timer recording.
The following are possible errors:
- The start time of the recording is less than 15 minutes
from the present time.
- The end time of recording is more than 15 minutes from
the present time and the start time was more than 8 hours
ago.
Email cannot be sent or received while the GUI is
displayed on the TV screen connected to the recorder.
Check remaining space on HDD using email
The remaining space on the internal HDD can be
checked using email.
Enter the following in the body of the email.
e.g. open rdstyle prog remain
Remaining space
Note
Enter only single-byte letters as text, and enter a space
between each item.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM169
170
Network Navi
If you are having a difficulty with Network Navi features...
The following are Network Navi features each of which must be set for proper operation.
Complete the basic settings as in the table below, and then make appropriate changes to the settings.
If the Network Navi features are not operating, check the settings again to make sure all inputs are
correct.
Network Navi Features
Network Navi
Virtual Remote Control
Net Dubbing
Setting a timer recording
using email
Net Monitor
Operating Environment/Basic Settings
OS:Windows® 2000/XP
Mac OS X(10.4)
JAVA VM Ver.1.5 (For Mac OS X: 1.4.2)
Network Setting
OS:Windows® 2000/XP
Mac OS X(10.4)
JAVA VM Ver.1.5 (For Mac OS X: 1.4.2)
Network Setting
OS:Windows® 2000/XP
Mac OS X (10.4)
Network Setting
OS:Windows® 2000/XP
Mac OS X (10.4)
Network Setting
An always-on connection environment is
required.
OS:Windows® 2000/XP
Mac OS X(10.4)
Internet Explorer 6.0 (Safari 2.0 for Mac
OS X)
Java VM Ver.1.5 (For Mac OS X: 1.4.2)
Network Setting
Required Settings
Other settings
Port Number
Settings for Net Dubbing
Set Request from another device to Accept.
Enter a group name. (Set the same group name for
all the devices that you wish to dub.)
Enter the group password. (Set the same password
for all the devices that you wish to dub.)
Mail Setting
Installation and settings of QuickTime® (v. 7.0.2)
Settings for Net Monitor
Network Navi features (Continued)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM170
Function setup
You can change the default settings to customize
performance to your preference.
Customizing the function
settings
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM171
172
Function setup
Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.
Notes
SETUP button is available even
during normal playback.
However some items may be
grayed out and they cannot be
selected. In this case, try again
after playback is stopped.
SETUP button is not available
during recording, Recorded Title
Play, Chase Play or Pause TV
modes.
1Press SETUP.
The following setup display appears.
2
Press / to select the icon of a group that
contains a desired item, then press ENTER.
For details on each setting, see the next page.
e.g. When Display settings is selected:
3Press / to select a desired item, then press
ENTER.
4Refer to the explanations on pages beginning
from 176, to change the selection by / or
other buttons, then press ENTER.
To select another item in the same group, repeat
steps 3 to 4.
To shift to another group, press O button then repeat
steps 2 to 4.
5Press SETUP.
The setup display disappears and the setting is
completed.
SETUP
e.g.
DVD subtitle language
DVD d i l
DVD audio language
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language English
English
No subtitle
O
SETUP
e.g.
Transparency
Startup screen
On screen display
Display settings
Background
Closed caption
Screen protector
TV shape 4:3LB
On
25%
On
On
Blue
TV
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
SETUP
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Start
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM172
173
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
Setting
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
DVD-VIDEO
DVD audio language
DVD-VIDEO
DVD subtitle language
DVD-VIDEO
DVD dynamic range control
DVD-VIDEO
Karaoke vocal
DVD-VIDEO
DVD parental lock
DVD-VIDEO
DVD title stop
DVD-RW
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-R
Picture/Audio settings
Pause/Still
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Output Black level
Custom picture select
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Custom picture setting
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Progressive conversion
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Play DNR
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Audio out select
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Virtual surround
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
SAP
(Continued)
Page
176
176
176
177
177
177
178
179
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
181
Details
To select a preferred language for disc menus.
To select a preferred language for the sound track.
To select a preferred language for subtitles.
To turn on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier to
hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour playback.
To turn on or off the vocal output during DVD KARAOKE disc
playback.
To turn the parental lock function on or off.
To turn on or off a feature that automatically stops playback
after a title has been viewed.
To select the resolution of still pictures. (Field/Frame)
To select the black level of playback pictures.
To select from standard or three customized picture settings.
To customize picture quality settings and store them.
To select the system of output signal. (Only when connected
to a PROGRESSIVE TV.)
To select a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.
To select an output sound format corresponding to your
system connection.
To turn on or off expansive virtual surround sound effects from
just two speakers.
To monitor and record SAP broadcast.
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM173
174
Setting
Display settings
TV shape
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
On screen display
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Transparency
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Startup screen
Screen protector
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Background
Closed caption
Operational settings
Operation beep
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Completion beep
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
IR code
Instant skip interval
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Instant replay interval
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
CD
Title thumbnail point
DVD-R
DVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD/RAM title play
HDD
DVD-RAM
Still group interval
DVD-RAM
Priority contents
Details
To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your
TV.
To activate or deactivate the operational status display (e.g.,
) on the TV screen.
To select the transparency of the on-screen menus relative to
background pictures.
To turn on or off the start-up screen setting that makes the
background picture appear automatically when turning on the power.
To turn the screen saver on or off.
To select a display status when no video signals are present.
To select where you turn on or off closed caption.
To turn on or off the confirmation beeper announcing when
each remote command is received.
To select whether or not a buzzer sounds when dubbing and
certain functions are finished.
To switch the remote control codes that operate the recorder.
To set the time interval to skip when INSTANT SKIP button is
pressed once.
To set the time interval to go back when INSTANT REPLAY
button is pressed once.
To select the position of the thumbnail image counting from
the beginning of the title that has been recorded.
To activate resume play per title or continuous play.
To select an interval of still picture display.
To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture) files
and MP3/WMA (audio) files.
Page
181
181
181
181
181
182
182
182
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
183
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.23, 9:00 AM174
175
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
Setting
DVD recorder operation
User record quality
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Picture record mode
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Input Black level
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Aspect ratio (Video mode)
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD compatible mode
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-Video:CHP create
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Rec DNR
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
3D Y/C separation
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Relay recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
Management settings
Network Setting
Genre setting
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Front Display
HDD auto stop
HDD
All HDD titles delete
HDD
HDD format
HDD
DVD-RAM physical format
DVD-RAM
DVD Drive speed setting
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Version (Main/DVD drive)
Initial settings
Language
Time & Date setting
Guide and Clock reset
Set Top Box setting
Details
To select picture and sound quality settings for a manual
program recording.
To make further settings when you cannot adjust the image quality
with Custom picture setting of the Picture/audio settings.
To select the black level of recording pictures.
To set the aspect ratio for DVD-R recording.
To set the audio for DVD-R recording.
To set whether or not chapters are to be automatically created
at a specified interval for DVD-R recording.
To activate or deactivate the 3D digital noise reduction.
To activate or deactivate the 3D digital filter to execute Y/C
(Brightness/Color) separation.
To turn on or off a function that will automatically switch recording from
a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD when there is less than 10 minutes of
space available on the DVD-RAM disc or when there is no disc loaded.
To set a recorder for the Network Navi function.
To register the frequently used genre on the menu.
To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby mode.
To turn on or off a power saving function that stops the HDD
after a certain period of inactivity.
To delete all the titles recorded on the HDD, leaving the
Library information on a DVD-RAM disc.
To initialize the HDD.
To perform physical formatting of a DVD-RAM disc.
To reduce the mechanical noise during High speed dubbing.
( page 100 105)
To display the version of the software. The version is only
displayed and cannot be set.
To select a preferred language for on-screen displays (except
TV Guide On Screen).
To set the clock of the recorder.
To correct the clock of the recorder.
To control channels of a connected satellite set top box from
the recorder.
Page
183
184
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
147
186
186
186
186
187
35
187
187
187
187
187
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM175
176
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language Code List
( page 195).
2) Select the first character by pressing
/ buttons (or ADJUST button).
3) Press / buttons to shift. Select second
character by pressing / buttons (or
ADJUST button).
4) Press ENTER button.
Note
Some DVD video discs may be played in a different
language from that you selected. A prior language may be
programmed by the disc.
DVD subtitle language
DVD-VIDEO
English:
To display subtitles in English.
French:
To display subtitles in French.
Spanish:
To display subtitles in Spanish.
No Subtitle:
To disable subtitles.
Others:
To make a further choice.
After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) 4)
below.
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from Language Code List
( page 195).
2) Select the first character by pressing
/ buttons (or ADJUST button).
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
DVD-VIDEO
English:
To display disc menus in English.
French:
To display disc menus in French.
Spanish:
To display disc menus in Spanish.
Others:
To make a further language choice.
After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) 4)
below.
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from Language Code List
( page 195).
2) Select the first character by pressing
/ buttons (or ADJUST button).
3) Press / buttons to shift. Select second
character by pressing / buttons (or
ADJUST button).
4) Press ENTER button.
Note
Some DVD video discs may not include your preset
language. In this case, the recorder automatically displays
disc menus consistent with the discs initial language
setting.
DVD audio language
DVD-VIDEO
English:
To play sound tracks recorded in English.
French:
To play sound tracks recorded in French.
Spanish:
To play sound tracks recorded in Spanish.
Others:
To make further choices.
After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) - 4)
below.
SETUP
e.g.
DVD subtitle language
DVD d
y
namic ran
g
e control
DVD audio language
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language English
English
No subtitle
On
Code
EN
SETUP
e.g.
DVD subtitle language
DVD dynamic range control
DVD player settings
Karaoke vocal
DVD disc menu language English
English
No subtitle
On
Off
Code
EN
DVD audio language
SETUP
e.g.
DVD dynamic range control
DVD player settings
Karaoke vocal
DVD disc menu language English
English
No subtitle
On
Off
Code
DVD audio language
DVD subtitle language
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM176
177
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
3) Press / buttons to shift. Select the
proceeding character by pressing /
buttons (or ADJUST button).
4) Press ENTER button.
Notes
Some DVD video discs may be set to display subtitles in a
different language from that you selected. A prior subtitle
language may be programmed by the disc.
Some DVD video discs allow you to change subtitle
selections only via the disc menu. In this case, press
MENU button and choose the appropriate subtitle
language from the selection on the disc menu.
DVD dynamic range control
DVD-VIDEO
Turns on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier
to hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour
playback.
Off:
The DVD Dynamic Range Control does not function.
On:
The DVD Dynamic Range Control functions.
Notes
This function is available only for a disc recorded in Dolby
Digital format.
Depending on the disc you play back, the actual effect of
this function differs.
Karaoke vocal
DVD-VIDEO
Off:
The main vocal sound is not output.
On:
The main vocal sound is output.
Notes
This function is available only for a DVD KARAOKE disc
recorded in Dolby Digital Multi Channel format.
If you want to enjoy KARAOKE function, connect an
amplifier or other such device to this recorder.
DVD parental lock
DVD-VIDEO
DVD video discs equipped with the Parental Lock
function have a predetermined limitation level. The
limitation level or limitation method may differ depending
on the disc. For example the whole contents of a disc
may not be played back, or an extreme violent scene
maybe cut or replaced automatically by another scene.
Important
Depending on discs, it may not be evident whether the
disc is compatible with Parental Lock function. Make
sure that Parental Lock function you set is activated
correctly.
On:
Select this to activate Parental Lock function or to
change the setting.
After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) 3)
below.
Off:
Deactivate the Parental Lock function.
After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) below.
1) Enter a 4-digit password by using the
number buttons, then press ENTER button.
If you make a mistake entering your password,
press CLEAR button before pressing ENTER
button, and re-enter the correct password.
2) Press / / / buttons to move the
cursor. Then press ADJUST button to enter
the code of a country/area whose standards
were used to rate a DVD video disc,
referring to the list below.
(Continued)
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM177
178
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
Country/Area Code
AUSTRALIA AU
BELGIUM BE
CANADA CA
CHINA CN
CHINA HONG KONG HK
DENMARK DK
FINLAND FI
FRANCE FR
GERMANY DE
INDONESIA ID
ITALY IT
JAPAN JP
MALAYSIA MY
NETHERLANDS NL
NORWAY NO
PHILIPPINES PH
RUSSIAN FEDERATION RU
SINGAPORE SG
SPAIN ES
SWEDEN SE
SWITZERLAND CH
TAIWAN TW
THAILAND TH
UNITED KINGDOM GB
UNITED STATES US
3) Select the desired limitation level by
pressing / buttons, and then press
ENTER button.
Unless the Parental Lock function is set to
Off, a disc that has a higher limitation level
than your selected limitation level cannot be
played back. For example, if you select level 7,
discs exceeding level 8 are locked and cannot
be played back.
When US is selected, its limitation level
corresponds to the following settings.
Level 7 : NC-17 Level 3 : PG
Level 6 : R Level 1 : G
Level 4 : PG13
To change the limitation level of Parental Lock
function
Follow step 1) - 3) above.
To change the password
1) Press STOP button 4 times after selecting
On and Off in order, and then press
ENTER button.
The password is cleared.
2) Enter a new 4-digit password by using the
number buttons.
3) Press ENTER button.
DVD title stop
DVD-RW
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-R
Off:
Plays back all following titles on the disc after the
current title has been viewed.
On:
Recorder is stopped after playback of current title
being viewed is completed.
SETUP
e.g.
DVD parental lock level setting
Area code
Level 8
Level 7
Level 6
Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Prohibited
Allowed
U S
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM178
179
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
Picture/Audio settings
Pause/Still
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Auto:
Normal setting. Pause the moving image without
blurring.
Frame:
Displays high resolution still image.
Output Black level
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
You can adjust the black level of the output signal.
Standard:
Normal black level.
Enhanced:
To display deeper, richer black than in Standard
setting.
Note
This function is not available when the HDMI connection is
used.
Custom picture select
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Select from between 4 picture settings (Normal, Setting
1-3) you stored in the memory.
Note
This setting is not available when the HDMI connection is
used.
Custom picture setting
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
You can adjust fine picture quality and store up to 3
custom picture settings in the memory of the recorder.
1) Press / button to select a desired setting
from 3 settings, and then press ENTER
button.
2) Press / buttons to select adjustable
items, and then press / buttons to select
each parameter.
Brightness
(0) Darker Brighter (14)
Contrast
(7) Lower Higher (7)
Color
(7) Duller Brighter (7)
Tint
(7) Red Green (7)
Edge Enhance
Soft/OFF/Sharp
Gamma
OFF/1/2
3) After adjusting the items, press ENTER
button.
Note
This setting is not available when the HDMI connection is used.
Progressive conversion
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
There are two types of source content in pictures
recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures
recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video
content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per
second). Make this selection according to the type of
content being viewed.
Auto:
Select this position normally.
The DVD player automatically detects source content,
film or video, of playback source, and converts that
signal in the progressive output format in an
appropriate method.
Video:
The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it in
the progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of video content pictures.
Film:
The DVD player converts film content pictures in the
progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of film content pictures.
The progressive output feature will be most effective
under this selection.
Note
Depending on a disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled.
SETUP
e.g.
Custom picture select
Off
Virtual surround
Off
SAP
Standard
Output Black level
Normal
Picture/Audio settings
Play DNR
Pause / Still
Auto
Auto
Progressive conversion
Bitstream
Audio out select
Setting 1
Setting 2
Setting 3
Custom picture setting
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM179
180
Play DNR
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Selects a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.
Press / buttons to select an item then select On or
Off using / buttons.
3D-DNR:
Off:
Not activated.
On:
Reduces the noise levels of brightness signals and
color signals present in the video signal during
playback.
Mosquito NR:
Off:
Not activated.
On:
Reduces mosquito (flicker) noise occurring in the
contour sections of images.
Block NR:
Off:
Not activated.
On:
Reduces noise that appears in the form of blocks
(block noise) in a portion of the screen during
playback of images with rapid movement.
DNR is the abbreviation for Digital Noise Reduction.
Notes
DNR effects vary depending on the disc.
Detailed images may no longer be visible depending on
the scene due to the effects of DNR.
Depending on the disc or scene, On may produce
undesirable picture artifacts or increase noises on
contours. In this instance, select Off.
Audio out select
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Selects an output sound format corresponding to your
audio system connection.
For details about output sound selection, see page
192.
Bitstream:
Select this when an amplifier equipped with built-in
Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG1 decoder is connected to
this recorder.
When you play a disc recorded in Dolby Digital, DTS
or MPEG1 format, digital audio signal is output.
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
Analog 2ch:
Select this when a TV or other audio device is
connected to this recorder via the ANALOG output
connectors.
PCM:
Select this when a 2ch digital stereo amplifier is
connected to this recorder. When you play a disc
recorded in Dolby Digital, MPEG1 or MPEG2 format,
the sound is converted to the PCM (2ch) format and
output.
HDMI-Auto:
Select this when an HDMI compatible device equipped
with a Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder is
connected to this recorder.
When you play a disc recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS
format, the sound is output in the bitstream format.
If the connected HDMI device does not support Dolby
Digital or MPEG, the recorder outputs sounds in the
linear PCM format. If it does not support DTS, the
recorder outputs no sounds.
Virtual surround
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
This lets you playback discs with acoustic effects having
greater depth and presence even when using only two
speakers.
Off:
Virtual surround effect not activated.
On:
Virtual surround effect activated.
Notes
This function is only activated when playing back a disc
recorded with Dolby Digital.
This function is only activated when Audio Out Select is
set to PCM if the BITSTREAM/PCM jack of this DVD
recorder is connected to an amplifier or similar device.
When the virtual surround effect is activated, Dolby
Progressive Sound may be deactivated or sound differently
than usual.
When the virtual surround effect is activated, the volume
may sound differently than usual.
Set Virtual surround to Off if the audio sounds distorted.
Manufactured under license from QSound Labs, Inc. U.S. patent
Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and 5,440,638 and various foreign
counterpart. Copyright QSound Labs, Inc. 1998-2002. QXpanderTM
is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc. All rights reserved.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM180
181
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
Display settings
TV shape
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your
TV.
For details on this setting, see TV shape setting
( page 48, INSTALLATION GUIDE).
On screen display
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Off:
Deactivates the operational status display (e.g., ) on
the TV screen.
On:
Activates the operational status display (e.g., ) on
the TV screen.
Transparency
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Selects the transparency of the recorders on-screen
menus and its relationship to the background image.
0% : 25% : 50%
Startup screen
Off:
The startup screen is not displayed.
On:
The startup screen appears automatically when
turning on the power.
Screen protector
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
To reduce TV screen damage (image burn), this function
disengages the pause mode of a playback image. The
display returns to the normal TV screen when the
recorder remains idle for more than 15 minutes. In time
slip mode, the playback pause is released.
If this function is set to On, the recorder, if freezes, may
return to the normal by leaving it for about 15 minutes or
longer.
(Continued)
SAP
SAP (Second Audio Program broadcast) is separate
audio program, usually broadcast in a second language
with the main language.
Off:
The main sound is received.
On:
SAP sound (second language) is received.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM181
182
Operational settings
Operation beep
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Turn on or off a confirmation beeper announcing when a
command is received.
Off:
Turns off the beep sound.
On:
Turns on the beep sound.
Note
You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this
setting.
Completion beep
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
This is used to set whether or not a buzzer sounds when
dubbing and certain functions are finished.
Off:
Buzzer does not sound.
On:
Buzzer sounds.
Note
You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this
setting.
IR code
Switches the remote control codes to operate the
recorder. If you use the second and third TOSHIBA HDD/
DVD video recorders, set the different remote codes for
each recorder to avoid confusion in the response of the
recorders.
For details about this setting, refer to Operating the
second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video recorders
with the remote control of this recorder ( page 52,
INSTALLATION GUIDE).
DR 1 : DR 2 : DR 3
Instant skip interval
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Sets how much time is skipped when INSTANT SKIP
button is pressed.
5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.
Function setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Off:
Deactivates the screen protector function.
On:
Activates the screen protector function.
Note
Toshiba does not guarantee that this function protects the
TV screen by all means.
Background
Selects a screen color when receiving no video signals
such as selecting a non-broadcasting channel.
Off:
No color.
Black:
Black is displayed.
Blue:
Blue is displayed.
Important
Depending on signal reception, the Background setting
may be cleared. To prevent this, set this function to
Off.
Closed caption
To select where you turn on or off closed captioning.
Off:
To disable closed caption.
TV:
Closed caption data is decoded on the connected TV.
To turn on or off closed caption, operate the connected
TV.
Recorder:
Closed caption data is decoded on this recorder.
You cannot turn off closed caption on the connected
TV.
Notes
While the recorder is sending signals in the progressive
output format, closed caption is disabled regardless of this
setting.
Depending on the signal condition, closed caption may not
be displayed properly. In this case, select Off.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM182
183
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
DVD recorder operation
User record quality
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
You can select from 5 combined picture and sound
quality recording settings prior to actual recording.
Actual selection applied becomes the default setting for
normal recording or programmed recording.
To make a combination of picture and sound
quality settings.
1)
Press / / / buttons to select the desired
item (Mode, Rate, or Audio quality)
.
2) Press ADJUST button to change the setting of
each item.
To apply the combination of picture and sound
quality settings.
1) Press / / / buttons to select a media to
record on (HDD or DVD).
2) Press ADJUST button to change the setting.
You can confirm the available recording time for
the selected setting on the bottom screen.
3) Press ENTER button.
Notes
A combination of picture and sound quality settings can be
set for the HDD and a DVD-RAM disc respectively.
You can change the combination of picture and sound
quality settings also by displaying Quick Menu on LIBRARY
MENU or in stop mode, then selecting User record
quality. Either of the above methods updates the setting of
this recorder.
If you set SP or LP, you cannot select L-PCM.
Depending on the sound quality settings, the upper limit for
the picture quality setting differs.
You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by
0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.0
to 2.0.)
Instant replay interval
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Sets how far back is replayed when INSTANT REPLAY
button is pressed.
5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.
Title thumbnail point
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
For recorded titles, sets how far a scene from the start is
set as the title thumbnail.
0 sec. : 3 sec. : 10 sec. : 35 sec. : 1 min. : 5 min.
Note
Thumbnails can also be changed to other scenes.
See page 126.
HDD/RAM title play
HDD
DVD-RAM
Sets the resume play per title.
Title resume:
Remembers the point where you stop playback.
Allows you to resume the playback from that point.
Serial playback:
You can play back titles (Original, Playlist) stored in
the HDD or a DVD-RAM continuously.
Because there is no division between titles, the
recorder remembers only the last point where you
stopped playback.
Still group interval
DVD-RAM
Sets an interval for display of still pictures (in seconds)
when playing back a collection of still images.
1 sec. : 2 sec. : 3 sec. : 5 sec. : 10 sec. : Default
Priority contents
To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture)
files and MP3/WMA (audio) files.
Photo: JPEG files take priority over MP3/WMA files.
Audio: MP3/WMA files take priority over JPEG files.
Note
If this selection does not correspond to disc contents, the
recorder will take a longer time to start playback of the disc.
SETUP
e.g.
HDD DVD
Custom setting
Setting
Total recording time: approx. 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
Manual
6.6
Mode
Rate
Audio quality
Manual1
2
3
4
5
Setting 1
L-PCM
D/M1
SP
LP
Manual
Manual
6.6
4.6
2.2
6.0
3.2
SP
4.6
D/M1
L-PCM
D/M1
D/M2
D/M1
User record quality
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM183
184
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-RW
DVD-R
To set the aspect ratio when recording onto a DVD-R/RW
disc.
4:3:
Fixes the aspect ratio at 4:3.
16:9:
Fixes the aspect ratio at 16:9.
Note
When the bit rate on User record quality is set to
1.0(Mbps) and 1.4(Mbps), pictures are recorded in 4:3
aspect ratio even if 16:9 is selected.
DVD compatible mode
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
To set whether or not recording is to be performed in the
format for which recording is allowed by the DVD-Video
standard (video, audio and other data) during recording.
This selection is important for contents when recorded on
this recorder, if they will be copied to DVD-R/RW.
Off:
For recording of contents which will not be copied to a
DVD-R/RW disc.
Both the main and SAP sounds are recorded.
When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW disc, this is
ineffective. The recorder will automatically regard this
as Main, and record sound of the main channel only
in stereo. Select Main or SAP for DVD-R/RW
recording.
Main:
Records sound of the main channel only in stereo.
SAP:
Records sound of the SAP channel only in stereo.
Notes
When you select the manual rate of the picture quality
between 3.0 and 3.8 and set this mode to Main or SAP,
the picture quality may become lower than when you set
this mode to Off.
You can change the setting from Quick Menu.
It is no use to make this selection when dubbing. Select
when recording.
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
Picture record mode
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Adjusts problems with the brightness of video signals of
TV broadcasts or other external input.
Press
/ buttons to select the source, and / buttons
to select the mode.
(Only use this setting when you cannot adjust the
brightness satisfactorily with the Custom picture setting in
Picture/Audio settings ( page 179) of this recorder.)
Important:
This setting changes the video signal to record and the
recorded signal is not returned to the original state even
when this setting is changed after recording. When
duplicating from a VHS tape, if you can check the video
recording state beforehand, we recommend first playing
back for a while and checking the overall brightness
tendency, then setting an appropriate mode.
Standard:
The brightness of signals received with this recorder
and external input signals are adjusted automatically.
This is normally the setting to use.
Mode 1:
This setting is used to record the signals darker when
the screen is too bright.
Mode 2, 3, 4:
As the number rises, the signals are recorded brighter.
Use these modes to adjust the brightness.
Input Black level
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
You can adjust the black level of the input signal.
Standard:
Normal black level.
Enhanced:
Brighter black level than in Standard setting.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM184
185
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
DVD-Video:CHP create
DVD-RW
DVD-R
To set whether chapters are to be automatically created
at a selected interval during DVD-R/RW recording.
Off:
Chapters are not set.
5 min. : 10 min. : 15 min. : 20 min.
To set the interval at which chapters are automatically
created to 5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes.
Note
The number of chapters has the upper limit, which varies
depending on the disc condition. If the number reaches it,
no more chapters are created.
Rec DNR
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
Selects the level of 3D digital noise reduction that can
reduce picture noise depending on the scene.
Off:
Deactivates the 3D digital noise reduction.
On:
Sets the normal level.
Expanded:
Increases digital noise reduction.
Notes
When you set Rec DNR to On or Expanded and set
3D Y/C Separation to On, the priority changes
depending on the input selection if you select the S-video
input. Rec DNR has priority, when you select the built-in
tuner or composite input, 3D Y/C Separation has priority.
If you want to avoid an afterimage, set this setting to Off.
3D Y/C separation
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
The 3D digital comb filter executes Y/C (Brightness/
Color) separation to reduce the color irregularity or cross
color interference.
Off:
Deactivates this function.
In an area where the broadcast reception is poor,
select this mode.
On:
Activates this function.
In normal conditions, select this.
Note
Refer to the Notes in the above Rec DNR.
Relay recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
Turn on or off a function that makes a recording
automatically onto the HDD when the remaining space of
a DVD-RAM disc is reduced to less than 10 minutes or
when a disc is not loaded.
Off:
Deactivates this function.
On:
Activates this function.
Notes
The Relay recording does not function during Rate
Conversion Dubbing or Line-U Dubbing.
During playback of the HDD when you start Relay
recording and CONTENT MENU is displayed, playback
stops.
During Relay recording, HDD Title Playback is not
available.
When the remaining space on the HDD is small, Relay
recording does not function.
Time slip function ( page 69) is not possible while On
is selected.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM185
186
HDD auto stop
HDD
Off:
Turns off the HDD auto stop mode.
On:
Turns HDD drive off after recorder is idle for
approximately 5 minutes.
When PLAY or REC button is pressed for the HDD
while the HDD drive is turned off, it takes a little longer
time to play or record.
All HDD titles delete
HDD
This deletes all the titles on the HDD. Only the recorded
contents are deleted, so a DVD-RAM disc Library
information and reservation history are left as is and can
continue to be used.
1) Press / buttons to select Yes, then
press ENTER button.
2) Confirm the message, press / buttons to
select Yes and then press ENTER button.
Deletion of all titles starts.
If you want to cancel the deleting, select No.
Note
If you periodically execute All HDD titles delete, this holds
down fragmentation (increased complexity) of the disc and
maintains good operability.
Yes No
All titles are about to be deleted in
spite of title protected. Proceed?
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
Management settings
Network Setting
See Network Navi ( page 147).
Genre setting
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
This registers a frequently used genre name onto the
menu. Genre names registered here are displayed in the
Genre on Quick Menu.
1) Press / buttons to select a position in
the Current Genre List you want to
change, then press ENTER button.
A list of genres appears.
You can turn the pages using button.
2) Press / buttons to select a genre, then
press ENTER button.
A list of genre names appears.
3) Press / buttons to select a genre name,
then press ENTER button.
The selected genre name replaces the previous
one of the position you selected at step 1).
4)
Repeat steps 1) to 3) to register genre
names.
5) When genre names are registered, press
O button to return to Management Set-
tings menu.
Front Display
To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby
mode.
Off:
Sets the front panel display to turn off in the standby
mode.
On:
Sets the front panel display to turn on in the standby
mode.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM186
187
Library Function setup
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi Others
HDD format
HDD
Initializes the HDD.
Normally it is not required to initialize the HDD. However
when the HDD does not function correctly, initializing the
HDD may solve the situation. If you initialize the HDD, all
titles and library information stored in the HDD are
permanently deleted.
1) Press / buttons to select Start, then
press ENTER button.
2) Confirm the message, press / buttons to
select Start, and then press ENTER
button.
Initialization of the HDD starts.
If you want to cancel the initializing, select
Cancel.
DVD-RAM physical format
DVD-RAM
See page 35.
DVD Drive speed setting
DVD-RDVD-RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
To reduce the mechanical noise during High speed
dubbing ( page 100 105).
High speed:
Usual mode.
Low speed:
The dubbing speed is lowered to reduce the
mechanical noise.
0
HDD Format
Start Cancel
Entire disc contents including
library will be erased
if disc is formatted. Proceed?
Format
%
e.g.
Initial settings
Language
To set a preferred language for on-screen displays.
English:
To view on-screen display in English.
French:
To view on-screen display in French.
Time & Date setting
To set the clock manually if it is not set correctly.
1) Press / and ADJUST ( /) to set the
clock.
/ buttons:
To select Year, Date, Time, or am/pm.
ADJUST ( /) buttons:
To change the date.
( / buttons can also be used in addition to
ADJUST ( /) buttons.)
2) After setting all the items, press ENTER.
3) Press / to select Yes, then press
ENTER.
Note
If the clock is set with TV Guide On Screen®, this setting is
not available.
Guide and Clock reset
To correct the clock of the recorder.
This option includes the TV Guide On Screen® resetting
process, followed by power off of the recorder. Refer to
the guidance to operate.
Set Top Box setting
To control channels of a connected satellite set top box
from the recorder.
See C: Satellite set top box setting ( page 42,
INSTALLATION GUIDE).
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM187
188
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Function setup
Picture quality setting
SP
LP
MN
Setting of picture and sound quality for recording
Sound setting
D/M1 D/M2 L-PCM
DVD
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
HDD
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
DVD
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
HDD
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
DVD
No
No
Ye s
HDD
No
No
Ye s
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM188
Others
Before calling service personnel
Output sound conversion table
Error codes on the display
window
Recording duration
Language Code List
Specification
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM189
190
Before calling service personnel
If you experience any of the following difficulties while using this unit, check the list below before consulting your
nearest Toshiba dealer.
Others
Power
The power is not turned on.
The power cord is not connected securely.
Connect the power cord securely.
Connection to your TV
There is no TV picture.
The video cable to this recorder and your TV is not
connected securely.
Connect the video cable to this recorder and your
TV securely.
The input select on your TV is not set property.
Select the input to which this recorder is
connected.
TV reception
There is no picture.
The antenna cable is not connected securely.
Reconnect the antenna cable securely.
There is poor reception.
Channel settings are not completed.
Set the channel settings.
The antenna cable is not connected securely.
Reconnect the antenna cable securely.
Antenna signal is poor.
Consult your dealer for adjustment.
HDMI connection
There is no picture.
Your TV is connected with the recorder via some
device.
Connect directly your TV with the recorder.
The HDMI cable is not connected securely.
Reconnect the HDMI cable securely.
The current HDMI output signal is not compatible
with your TVs input signal.
Press PROG/HDMI button to select the
appropriate output signal.
The sound cannot be heard.
•“Audio out select of Picture/Audio settings is not
set to HDMI-Auto.
Set the current output sound of Audio out select
to HDMI-Auto.
Playback
A DVD or CD does not play.
The format of the recorded data does not correspond
to this recorder, or the region number is neither 1
nor ALL.
Check the disc.
A defective or dirty disc is inside.
Change the disc.
The HDD mode is selected.
Press DVD button.
The HDD does not play.
The DVD mode is selected.
Press HDD button.
During playback, picture noise appears.
Picture noise may appear in the following cases. It is
not a malfunction.
There is picture noise in the original recording.
Weather, reception conditions may cause noise.
The data transmission rate is set to low.
The image data processing of this recorder cannot
follow dynamic movement on the screen. (High
video data rate)
A physical error has occured on the DVD disc.
If an error occurs while reading data of a disc, block-
noises may be produced there. Repeated reading of
this location where the error occurred (retry) can
decrease the generation of block noise. However, it
can also raise the possibility of unintended delays or
stops of playback. In order to prevent them, the
recorder limits the number of times of retry.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM190
191
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Recording
Cannot be recorded on a DVD-RAM disc.
The disc is protected from deleting data.
Set the write-protect tab to the opposite of
PROTECT ( page 8).
The disc is protected by a PC or the recorder.
Disable the protection on the device which
protected the disc.
The disc space is not sufficient.
Delete unwanted data ( page 55) or prepare a
new disc.
The disc is not initialized.
Initialize the disc ( page 34).
The disc may contain errors.
Complete the physical format on the disc
( page 35).
The physical format on the disc is not completed.
Complete the physical format on the disc
( page 35).
Cannot be recorded on the HDD.
The DVD mode is selected.
Press HDD button.
The disc space of the HDD is not sufficient.
Delete unwanted data ( page 55) or move the
contents to DVD-RAM discs ( page 100).
Some causes such as power failure may set the
recorder to reject the operation to protect the HDD.
Copy necessary contents recorded in the HDD to
a DVD-RAM disc, and initialize the HDD.
TV Guide On Screen®
TV program list does not appear when TV Guide
is pressed.
Leave the recorder turned off overnight.
Check the connection and setup TV Guide On
Screen® again.
Listings are not provided for satellite services.
If you are using a cable box:
Ensure the G-LINK® cable is connected and its IR
transmitter (the G-LINK® wand) is placed correctly
in front of the cable box. See page 25,
INSTALLATION GUIDE.
Leave the cable box turned on all of the time and
turn off the recorder when not in use or overnight.
Consult your service provider for more information.
Remote control
The remote control does not work.
The batteries in the remote control are exhausted.
Replace all the batteries in the remote control
( page 18, INSTALLATION GUIDE).
The light emitter of the remote control is not pointed
at the receptor of this recorder.
Point the emitter of the remote control at the
receptor of this recorder.
The receptor of this recorder is located too far away
from the remote control.
Operate the remote control within 7 meters (23 ft)
from the receptor of this recorder.
There are obstacles between the remote control and
this recorder.
Remove any obstacles.
The receptor is disturbed by sunlight or fluorescent
light.
Change the place of this recorder or shield the
light.
The remote mode is not appropriate.
Adjust the remote mode of the remote control and
this recorder ( page 52, INSTALLATION
GUIDE).
Clock
The clock blinks.
Set the clock ( page 187).
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM191
192
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
HDMI OUTPUT jack
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Bitstream
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Analog (L/R)
jacks
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
96 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/20 bit
96 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
(Noise)
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
HDMI OUTPUT jack
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Analog (L/R)
jacks
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
(Noise)
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Analog (L/R)
jacks
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
(Noise)
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Disc
DVD-
video
disc*
VIDEO CD
Audio
CD
HDD
DVD-RAM/
R/RW
CD-R/RW
Linear
PCM
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
96 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/20 bit
96 kHz/24 bit
Bitstream Analog 2ch PCM
•“DVD video disc above does not include DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder.
Do not select a connection or setting indicated as Noise in the above list.
*HDMI-Auto can output bitstream signals from the BISTREAM/PCM jack and the HDMI OUTPUT jack only when the
connected device is equipped with bitstream decoder.
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
HDMI OUTPUT jack
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Bitstream
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Audio setting ( page 180) and output in the default setting display
Disc
DVD-
video
disc*
VIDEO CD
Audio
CD
HDD
DVD-RAM/
R/RW
CD-R/RW
Sound format
Dolby Digital
DTS
MPEG2
MPEG1
Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit
DTS
Dolby Digital
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit
Dolby Digital
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit
MPEG2
MP3/WMA 44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit
DTS and DTS Digital Out are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Output sound conversion table
Others
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Linear
PCM
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
96 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/20 bit
96 kHz/24 bit
HDMI-Auto
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
HDMI OUTPUT jack
Bitstream/48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream/
Bitstream/48 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
Bitstream/48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream/48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream/48 kHz/16 bit
Audio setting ( page 180) and output in the
default setting display
Sound format
Dolby Digital
DTS
MPEG2
MPEG1
Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit
DTS
Dolby Digital
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit
Dolby Digital
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit
MPEG2
MP3/WMA 44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit
Analog (L/R)
jacks
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit
(Noise)
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM192
193
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Error codes on the display window
The recorder display shows error codes in addition to the message screen.
Main examples are as follows.
The ** in the ERR - ** message indicates an error code. To delete this display, press DISPLAY button on the
remote control.
Note
If you find an error code other than listed above, consult your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.
Error code
Description
ERR-01 Error detected in the physical format.
ERR-10 Exceeded volume detected.
ERR-11 Exceeded number of titles detected.
ERR-12 Exceeded number of chapters detected.
ERR-13 Copy protection information detected.
ERR-14 DVD disc access error detected.
ERR-15 Other errors detected.
ERR-16 HDD access error detected.
ERR-17 Wide image recorded at 1.4 Mbps detected.
ERR-18 Different aspects detected in the same part.
ERR-19 Different resolutions detected in the same part.
ERR-1A Different sound quality modes detected in the same
part.
ERR-1B Invalid control information detected.
ERR-1C Parts created in other recorder.
ERR-1D Parts created with DVD compatible mode = Off
detected.
ERR-1E Invalid parts detected.
ERR-1F Unexpected error detected.
ERR-2E Menu encode error detected.
ERR-2F Overflow of the menu size detected.
ERR-30 Exceeded maximum number of menus detected.
ERR-31 Recovery writing executed from compatibility of drive
and disc.
ERR-32 Incompatibility of disc format detected.
ERR-33 Disc protected.
ERR-34 Disc protected or system control data error detected.
ERR-35 Exceeded volume in disc budget calculation detected.
ERR-36 Recording failed. (Title not saved.)
ERR-37 Recording failed. (Title saved.)
ERR-38 Writing failed. (Title not reserved)
ERR-39 Writing failed. (Title saved.)
ERR-3A Unexpected error detected.
ERR-3B HDMI connection errors detected.
ERR-3C
ERR-3D
ERR-3E
ER-7000 Possible error detected in the HDD.
ER-000C Turning on the power failed.
ER-FAN An irregular stop of the ventilation fan detected.
When creating a DVD-Video
When creating a DVD-Video
When recording on DVD-R/RW
When dubbing to DVD-R/RW
When recording on DVD-R/RW
When using HDMI
Others
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM193
194
Recording duration
Others
The recording durations listed above are for reference purposes only and are not guaranteed. Recording durations
may vary.
The recording durations for DVD-RAM discs listed above are applicable to DVD-RAM discs that have been initialized.
Actual recording duration may vary depending on the disc used.
If you subtract the actual recording duration from the duration listed in this table, the calculated time period does not
represent the remaining time.
The consumption of space may vary depending on the picture and sound conditions of the recorded content.
Use the remaining disc space display feature to see the remaining space in the HDD and a DVD-RAM disc.
One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 9 hours.
The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc or 396 for the HDD. If the number of recorded titles
reaches these limits, you cannot record even if there is a residual quantity.
For D /M1 and D /M2, the digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used.
Setting 1 ( D /M1) records in Dolby Digital at 192 kbps, and Setting 2 ( D /M2) records at 384 kbps.
1.0
1.4
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.8
4.0
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.2
5.4
5.6
5.8
6.0
6.2
6.4
6.6
6.8
7.0
7.2
7.4
7.6
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.2
445
337
241
222
205
191
179
168
158
149
142
135
129
123
118
113
108
104
100
97
93
90
88
85
82
80
78
75
73
71
70
68
66
65
63
62
60
59
58
56
18
38
14
43
29
06
13
35
59
17
19
01
16
01
11
44
38
49
16
58
53
00
17
44
20
04
55
53
58
09
25
46
11
41
15
53
34
19
386
301
222
206
192
179
168
158
150
142
135
129
123
118
113
108
104
100
97
94
91
88
85
82
80
78
76
73
72
70
68
66
65
63
62
60
59
58
57
14
59
57
20
01
34
38
57
19
34
35
15
29
13
22
55
47
58
25
06
00
06
23
50
25
09
00
58
03
13
29
49
15
45
18
56
37
22
09
214
185
152
144
137
130
124
119
114
109
105
101
98
94
91
88
86
83
80
78
76
74
72
70
68
67
65
64
62
61
59
58
57
09
28
18
21
12
43
49
26
30
57
45
51
14
52
44
47
01
26
59
41
30
27
30
39
53
13
37
06
39
15
56
40
26
Picture
quality rate
Hour Minute Hour Minute
Sound rate
DD1 (192kHz)
HDD DVD-RAM
Hour Minute Hour Minute
HDD DVD-RAM
Hour Minute Hour Minute
Remarks
L-PCM
HDD DVD-RAM
Picture quality rate for LP with D/M2.
Picture quality rate for LP with D/M1.
Picture quality rate for SP with D/M2.
Picture quality rate for SP with D/M1.
Manual maximum setting for L-PCM.
Maximum value for the manual mode.
DD2 (384kHz)
08
06
04
04
03
03
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
04
06
21
00
42
26
13
01
51
41
33
25
18
12
06
01
56
52
48
44
40
37
34
31
28
25
23
20
18
16
14
12
10
09
07
05
04
03
01
06
05
04
03
03
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
59
27
01
43
27
13
02
51
42
33
25
19
12
07
01
56
52
48
44
40
37
34
31
28
25
23
20
18
16
14
12
10
09
07
06
04
03
01
00
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
51
20
44
35
27
20
14
08
02
57
53
49
45
41
38
34
31
29
26
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
09
07
06
04
03
02
00
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM194
195
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Language Code List
Others
Table of languages and their abbreviations
CHI (ZH)
DUT (NL)
ENG (EN)
FRE (FR)
GER (DE)
ITA (IT)
JPN (JA)
KOR (KO)
MAY (MS)
SPA (ES)
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
No alternate
language
Chinese
Dutch
English
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Malay
Spanish
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Belorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scottish Gaelic
Galician
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MT
MY
NA
NE
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laotian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sango
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tongan
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Tw i
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Abbreviation
Language
Abbreviation
Language
Abbreviation
Language
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM195
196
Specification
Others
Power requirement during operation
33.0W
Power requirement at standby
17.2W (Front panel display: on)
15.1W (Front panel display: off)
Power supply
120V AC, 60 Hz
Mass
5.8kg
External dimension
Width 434 x Height 81 x Depth 339mm
Incoming channels
TV: 2-69CH, Cable:1-125CH
Antenna input/output terminal
VHF/UHF: 75, F Connector
Signal system
Standard NTSC Color TV system
Laser
Semiconductor laser, Wavelength: 650nm/780nm
Format
DVD-Video format
Image recording system
MPEG2
Sound recording system
Dolby Digital M1, M2, Linear PCM
Internal hard disc
250 GB
VIDEO input
1.0Vp-p (75), Sync signal negative,
Pin jack x 3 systems, 2 at rear, 1 in front
VIDEO output
1.0Vp-p (75), Sync signal negative,
Pin jack x 1 system, 1 at rear
S-VIDEO input
(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75), Sync signal negative,
Mini DIN4 Pin x 3 systems
(C) 0.286Vp-p (75), 2 at rear, 1 in front
S-VIDEO output
(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75), Sync signal negative,
Mini DIN4 Pin x 2 systems
(C) 0.286Vp-p (75), 1 at rear
COMPONENT output (Y, PB, PR)
Y output (green), 1.0Vp-p (75),
Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 1 system
PB, PR output (blue, red), 0.7Vp-p (75),
Pin jack x 1 system each
AUDIO input
2.0V (rms), 22k or above, pin jack
(L, R) x 3 systems
2 at rear, 1 in front
AUDIO output
2.0V (rms), 2.2k or below, pin jack
(L, R) x 1 systems
1 at rear
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM (OPTICAL terminal)
Optical connector x 1 system
G-LINK jack
This is for connection of the supplied G-LINK® cable
only.
HDMI output
This is for connection of an HDMI cable.
DV input
4-pin x 1 in front
LAN port
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T x 1
Remote control
Wireless remote control (SE-R0199)
Operating conditions
Temperature: 41°F ~ 95°F (5°C ~ 35°C),
Position: Horizontal
Clock display
12 hour digital display
Clock accuracy
Quartz (monthly deviation: approximately ±30
seconds)
Designs and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
This model may not be compatible with features and/or
specifications that may be added in the future.
The Illustrations and screens described in this manual
may be exaggerated or simplified for easy recognition
and may be slightly different from the actual unit.
This model complies with the above specifications.
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM196
197
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Memo
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM197
198
Memo
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM198
199
Others
Function setup
Library
Editing
Playback
Recording
Introduction Network Navi
Memo
RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM199

Navigation menu